WO2021207895A1 - Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021207895A1
WO2021207895A1 PCT/CN2020/084542 CN2020084542W WO2021207895A1 WO 2021207895 A1 WO2021207895 A1 WO 2021207895A1 CN 2020084542 W CN2020084542 W CN 2020084542W WO 2021207895 A1 WO2021207895 A1 WO 2021207895A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
precoding
phase
channel
uplink signal
modulation
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/084542
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴晔
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/084542 priority Critical patent/WO2021207895A1/en
Priority to CN202080098864.5A priority patent/CN115336192A/en
Publication of WO2021207895A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021207895A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a method and communication device for transmitting uplink signals.
  • Multi-user multi-input multi-output can support the use of the same time-frequency resource to transmit different data between a network device and multiple terminal devices.
  • MU-MIMO Multi-user multi-input multi-output
  • the data transmitted by each terminal device may interfere with each other, thereby affecting the network device's reception of the uplink signal.
  • terminal equipment can reduce interference among multiple users through precoding.
  • To perform the precoding operation it is usually necessary to determine the precoding matrix based on the measured channel matrix, and then perform weighting processing on the signals of each transmit antenna port through the precoding matrix. Therefore, the processing complexity is relatively high for the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a method and communication device for transmitting uplink signals, in order to reduce the complexity of the precoding operation of terminal equipment.
  • a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: generating first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of a first downlink channel; the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on the measurement of the first downlink channel; The phase of the first downlink channel is used to determine the first precoding, and the first precoding is used to precode modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include binary phase shift keying (binary phase shift keying). shift keying, BPSK) symbols obtained by modulation, or symbols obtained by ⁇ /2-BPSK modulation; sending the first channel information.
  • BPSK binary phase shift keying
  • the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced.
  • the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
  • the phase of the first channel information indicating the first downlink channel in a predefined codewords M 1 corresponding to the codeword wherein, the phases of the M 1 codewords are equally divided in the range of 0 to 2 ⁇ , and M 1 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the indication of the phase of the downlink channel by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead is small.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding; A precoding precodes the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal to obtain a precoded first uplink signal; and sends the precoded first uplink signal through the first uplink channel.
  • the terminal device precodes the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal based on the first precoding indicated by the network device, that is, performs phase rotation on the constellation diagram obtained by modulating the first uplink signal to obtain the precoded The first uplink signal. Therefore, the precoding complexity can be reduced, and interference can be reduced, and the receiving performance of the first uplink signal can be improved.
  • the first precoding is determined based on predefined M 2 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 2 codewords is between 0 and 2 ⁇ Evenly distributed in the range, M 2 is an integer greater than 1; the second indication information is used to indicate the code word corresponding to the first precoding among the M 2 code words.
  • the indication of the first precoding by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead of the first precoding by the network device is relatively small.
  • M 1 and M 2 are the same.
  • the indication of the first precoding and the indication of the first channel information may share the same codebook.
  • M 1 and M 2 are different.
  • codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for feedback accuracy; or codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for precoding indication accuracy.
  • M 1 and M 2 can be decoupled from each other, and the configuration of their values is more flexible.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal,
  • the modulation method includes BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK.
  • the modulation method for the first uplink signal is predefined.
  • the protocol is predefined.
  • the modulation method includes BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK
  • the modulation mode for the first uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct to perform ⁇ /2 on the first uplink signal. -The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal is a predefined value. For example, pre-defined by the protocol.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal can be further restricted.
  • the phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is also used to transmit the second uplink signal
  • the phase of the first precoding is also the same as the phase of the second downlink channel.
  • the phase correlation of the second precoding wherein the second precoding is used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal, and the second downlink channel is used for transmitting the second uplink signal.
  • the signal corresponds to the second uplink channel.
  • the network device may determine the phase of the first precoding in combination with the phase of the second downlink channel and/or the phase of the second precoding, and then determine the first precoding.
  • the network device can limit the first precoding and the second precoding, so that the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal can be eliminated.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel, the frequency of the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel
  • the domain resources may respectively fall within the range used to determine the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, so that the determined first precoding and second precoding are respectively the same as those of the first uplink channel and the second downlink channel.
  • the second uplink channel is adapted.
  • the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
  • the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is used for the transmission of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, and the second uplink signal performs ⁇
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the /2-BPSK modulation is the same as the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the first uplink signal is modulated by ⁇ /2-BPSK on the same resource element (RE).
  • a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: precoding modulation symbols of the uplink signal based on precoding, the modulation symbols including symbols obtained by BPSK modulation, or symbols obtained by ⁇ /2-BPSK modulation, and the precoding phase is 0 Or ⁇ /2; Send the pre-coded uplink signal.
  • the terminal device can determine precoding based on a predefined phase, and then precode the modulation symbols of the uplink signal.
  • the precoding thus determined can be used to perform phase rotation on the constellation diagram of the modulation symbol of the uplink signal, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced.
  • phase of the precoding is 0, it is equivalent to not performing the precoding operation on the modulation symbol of the uplink signal. If the precoding phase is ⁇ /2, it is equivalent to a clockwise or counterclockwise rotation of the constellation diagram of the modulation symbol of the uplink signal by ⁇ /2.
  • the method further includes: receiving the precoding indication information.
  • the network device may indicate the precoding by indicating the phase of the precoding.
  • the relevant description in the first aspect of the previous article please refer to the relevant description in the first aspect of the previous article. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the precoding phase is a predefined value. For example, pre-defined by the protocol.
  • the uplink signal is the second uplink signal described in the first aspect or the third aspect
  • the precoding is the second precoding described in the first aspect or the third aspect
  • the precoding is
  • the encoded indication information may be, for example, the fourth indication information described in the third aspect.
  • the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are transmitted on the same time-frequency resource. Limiting the phase of the second precoding to 0 or ⁇ /2 can facilitate the network device to determine the first precoding.
  • the method further includes: receiving indication information of a reporting granularity, where the reporting granularity is reporting the first channel The frequency domain granularity on which the information is based.
  • the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
  • the reporting granularity of the first channel information by the terminal device may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: receiving indication information of precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is relative to the first The frequency domain granularity on which modulation symbols of an uplink signal are pre-coded.
  • the precoding granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
  • the granularity based on which the terminal device precodes the uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity.
  • the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity.
  • a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: receiving first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate a phase of a first downlink channel, and the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on a measurement on the first downlink channel;
  • the phase of the first downlink channel determines a first precoding, and the first precoding is used to precode modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include those obtained by binary phase shift keying BPSK modulation. Symbol, or a symbol obtained by ⁇ /2-BPSK modulation; sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced.
  • the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
  • the first indication information indicates the codeword corresponding to the phase of the first precoding in the predefined M 2 codewords; wherein , The phases of the M 2 codewords are uniformly distributed in the range of 0 to 2 ⁇ , and M 2 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the indication of the first precoding by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead of the first precoding by the network device is relatively small.
  • the phase of the first channel is determined based on predefined M 1 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 1 codewords is between 0 and Evenly distributed in the range of 2 ⁇ , M 1 is an integer greater than 1, and the first channel information indicates a code word corresponding to the phase of the first downlink channel among the M 1 code words.
  • the indication of the phase of the downlink channel by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead is small.
  • M 1 and M 2 are the same.
  • the indication of the first precoding and the indication of the first channel information may share the same codebook.
  • M 1 and M 2 are different.
  • codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for feedback accuracy; or codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for precoding indication accuracy.
  • M 1 and M 2 can be decoupled from each other, and the configuration of their values is more flexible.
  • the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal,
  • the modulation method includes BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK.
  • the modulation method for the first uplink signal is predefined.
  • the protocol is predefined.
  • the modulation method includes BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK
  • the modulation mode for the first uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct to perform ⁇ /2- on the first uplink signal.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK modulation.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained by performing ⁇ /2-BPSK modulation on the first uplink signal is a predefined value.
  • the protocol is predefined.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal can be further restricted.
  • the phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second precoding, and the second precoding Used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal; the difference between the phase difference between the second precoding and the first precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel The value is ⁇ /2, the second downlink channel corresponds to the second uplink channel used to transmit the second uplink signal, and the second uplink channel and the first uplink channel occupy the same time-frequency resources .
  • the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal.
  • the network device may determine the first precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel or the phase of the second precoding.
  • the difference between the phase difference between the second precoding and the first precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel is ⁇ /2, the difference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal The mutual interference is eliminated.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel, the frequency of the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel
  • the domain resources may respectively fall within the range used to determine the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, so that the determined first precoding and second precoding are respectively the same as those of the first uplink channel and the second downlink channel.
  • the second uplink channel is adapted.
  • the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
  • the method further includes: receiving second channel information, where the second channel information is used to indicate the phase of the second downlink channel.
  • the phase of the second precoding is 0 or ⁇ /2.
  • the network device may determine the second precoding according to the phase of the second downlink channel, or determine the phase of the second precoding as a predefined value, such as 0 or ⁇ /2.
  • the phase of the second precoding may also be a predefined value, such as a protocol predefined.
  • the network device may not determine and indicate the second precoding.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the second uplink signal, and Modulation methods include BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK.
  • the modulation method for the second uplink signal is predefined, such as a protocol predefined.
  • the modulation method includes BPSK or ⁇ /2-BPSK.
  • the modulation mode for the second uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct to perform ⁇ /2 on the second uplink signal. -The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK modulation.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained by performing ⁇ /2-BPSK modulation on the first uplink signal is a predefined value.
  • the protocol is predefined.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the second uplink signal can be further restricted.
  • the phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the second uplink signal is ⁇ /2-BPSK modulated is ⁇ /2-BPSK modulated with the first uplink signal
  • the modulation symbols obtained afterwards have the same phase.
  • the method further includes:
  • reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  • the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
  • the method further includes:
  • the precoding granularity is the frequency domain granularity based on precoding the modulation symbols.
  • the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
  • the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity.
  • the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity.
  • a communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the methods in the first and second aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first and second aspects.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the foregoing first and second aspects and the first and second aspects.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a communication device may be a network device or a component in the network device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the third aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the third aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit, and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the above-mentioned first to third aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to third aspects In the method.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a communication interface and a processor.
  • the communication interface is coupled with the processor.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the first to third aspects and the first to third aspects.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so that the device can execute any one of the first to third aspects and the first to third aspects.
  • the method in the implementation mode.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving instruction information may be a process of inputting received instruction information to the processor.
  • the information output by the processing may be output to the transmitter, and the input information received by the processor may come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the devices in the ninth and tenth aspects described above may be chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.;
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory.
  • the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the first to the first The method in any one of the three aspects and the first to third aspects.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first to the first
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting uplink signals according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 shows two blocks of uplink transmission resources in the same measurement bandwidth
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 are schematic block diagrams of communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • UMTS general mobile communication system
  • WiMAX worldwide Interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio access technology
  • next-generation communications such as 6G.
  • the 5G mobile communication system can be non-standalone (NSA) or standalone (SA).
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device to device (device to device, D2D) networks , Machine to Machine (M2M) network, Internet of Things (IoT) network or other networks.
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles.
  • vehicle-to-other devices vehicle-to-X, V2X, X can represent anything
  • the V2X may include: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication.
  • Infrastructure vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • the technical solution provided herein can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6 th Generation, 6G), mobile communication systems. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR ,
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • the CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical
  • AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU.
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • a macro base station for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.
  • the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc.
  • terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or
  • wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things.
  • IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband (NB) technology.
  • NB narrowband
  • terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc.
  • the main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 111 shown in FIG. 1, and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal devices 121 to 121 shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 124.
  • Each communication device such as the network device 111 and each terminal device 121 to 124 in FIG. 1, can be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the multiple antennas configured for each communication device may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the communication system 100 may also include other numbers of terminal devices.
  • the communication system 100 may also include more terminal devices. More terminal devices can directly communicate with the network device 111; they can also communicate with the network device 111 indirectly, such as communicating with the network device via one of the terminal device 121 to the terminal device 124 shown in the figure. This application does not limit this.
  • terminal devices can communicate directly.
  • D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices.
  • terminal devices 121 and 122, and between the terminal devices 123 and 124 D2D technology can be used to directly communicate. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can usually send uplink signals to the network device through the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) and the physical uplink share channel (PUSCH), for example, the uplink control information (UCI) is transmitted through the PUCCH. ) Or transmit uplink data through PUSCH, etc.
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink share channel
  • multiple terminal devices can use the same time-frequency resource to send uplink signals to the network device. However, this may cause mutual interference between the uplink signals of multiple terminal devices.
  • the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 in the figure may cause mutual interference between the uplink signals sent on the same time-frequency resource.
  • the terminal device 123 and the terminal device 124 may interfere with each other. Mutual interference between uplink signals sent on the same time-frequency resource.
  • the following formula shows an example of the signal from the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 received by the network device:
  • r represents the received signal
  • h 1 represents the first uplink channel
  • ⁇ 1 represents the amplitude of the first uplink channel
  • ⁇ 1 represents the phase of the first uplink channel
  • s 1 represents the signal transmitted through the first uplink channel
  • h 2 shows a second uplink channel
  • ⁇ 2 represents the second uplink channel amplitude
  • ⁇ 2 denotes the phase of the second upstream channels
  • S 2 is represented by a signal a second transmission over the uplink channel
  • E S represents the constellation diagram after modulated The energy of the symbol
  • n represents noise.
  • the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal interfere with each other, resulting in poor reception quality of the second uplink signal of the first uplink signal by the network device, thereby affecting the transmission performance of the system.
  • the UCI transmitted in the PUCCH may not be decoded correctly by the network device. This may cause subsequent network equipment to adversely affect the scheduling of downlink transmission.
  • terminal equipment can reduce interference among multiple users through precoding. Since the precoding operation usually needs to perform weighting processing on the signals of each transmit antenna port according to the precoding matrix, the processing complexity is relatively high for the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a method for transmitting uplink data, in order to reduce the complexity of the precoding operation.
  • instructions can include direct instructions and indirect instructions.
  • the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of a pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in an agreement) of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and give unified instructions, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information.
  • the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof.
  • the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs.
  • the embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method.
  • the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering that can make the instruction to be instructed Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
  • the information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • radio resource control signaling such as packet radio resource control (RRC) signaling
  • MAC layer signaling for example, includes MAC control element (CE);
  • physical layer signaling for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control). information, DCI).
  • pre-defined can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). Make a limit.
  • saving may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c.
  • a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • the network device may correspond to the network device 111 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, for example; the first terminal device and the second terminal device may correspond to the terminal devices 121 to 124 in the communication system shown in FIG.
  • the terminal devices such as the first terminal device and the second terminal device
  • components configured in the terminal device such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs.
  • the network devices shown in the following embodiments can also be replaced with components (such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs) configured in the network device.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 200 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 201 to step 216. The steps in the method 200 are described in detail below.
  • step 201 the network device obtains the phase of the first uplink channel or the phase of the first downlink channel.
  • the first uplink channel may be, for example, an uplink channel between the network device and the first terminal device.
  • the first downlink channel may be, for example, a downlink channel between the network device and the first terminal device. Since the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are both channels between the first terminal device and the network device, the two can pass through, for example, frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (time division duplexing). TDD) and other communication modes to realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals. Therefore, it can be considered that the first uplink channel corresponds to the first downlink channel.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • time division duplexing time division duplexing
  • the first uplink channel may be a physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
  • PUSCH physical uplink share channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the network device may determine the phase of the first uplink channel by measuring the first uplink channel, as shown in step 201a in FIG. 2. In another implementation manner, the network device may also obtain the phase of the first downlink channel from the first terminal device, as shown in 201b in FIG. 2. The following is a detailed description in combination with these two different implementations.
  • the network device may measure the first uplink channel based on the received uplink reference signal from the first terminal device, such as SRS, etc., to obtain the phase of the first uplink channel, as shown in step 201a Shown.
  • the specific method for the network device to measure the first uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the phase of the first uplink channel is used to determine the first precoding, and the first precoding may be used to precode the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal transmitted through the first uplink channel. Since the network device performs channel measurement on the first uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal, and then obtains the phase of the first uplink channel, the first precoding determined based on the phase of the first uplink channel is the same as that of the first uplink channel. Adapted. This implementation can be applied to communication modes such as FDD and TDD.
  • the network device may also measure the first uplink channel based on the measurement granularity.
  • the measurement granularity may refer to the frequency domain granularity on which the network device measures the first uplink channel.
  • the measurement granularity may be a subband, for example.
  • the measurement granularity can also be other possible frequency domain granularity. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device may obtain the measurement result of the first downlink channel by the first terminal device by sending a downlink reference signal, such as a CSI-RS.
  • a downlink reference signal such as a CSI-RS.
  • the network device can configure downlink reference signals with different time domain behaviors, such as configuring periodic (periodic), aperiodic (aperiodic), semi-persistant (semi-persistant, SP), etc., to obtain downlink reference signals for different time domain behaviors.
  • the measurement result of the downlink reference signal can also refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the network device may not receive the uplink reference signal from the first terminal device in a recent period of time, and therefore cannot obtain the latest channel information about the first uplink channel. In this case, the network device may determine the phase of the first downlink channel based on the measurement result of the first downlink channel from the first terminal device.
  • the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel may realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals through communication modes such as FDD or TDD, there may be a certain reciprocity between the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel .
  • the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are completely reciprocal; in the FDD communication mode, the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are also partially reciprocal. sex. Therefore, the phase of the first downlink channel can be approximated as the phase of the first uplink channel, which can be used to determine the first precoding. Therefore, the network device may also determine the first precoding based on the phase of the first downlink channel.
  • the first precoding thus determined can also be adapted to the first uplink channel to a certain extent.
  • the network device may receive the first channel information in step 201b, and the first channel information may be used to indicate the phase of the first downlink channel.
  • the first terminal device sends the first channel information.
  • the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel overlaps with the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel based on the measurement of the first terminal device.
  • the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel.
  • the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel.
  • the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel is the same as the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel. This is because the measurement result of the first downlink channel by the first terminal device is more suitable for determining the first precoding within the range of the measured frequency domain resources, and the determined first precoding can also be more compatible with the first uplink channel. adaptation.
  • the first terminal device may also send the first channel information based on the reporting granularity.
  • the reporting granularity may refer to the frequency domain granularity on which the first terminal device reports the first channel information.
  • the first channel information sent by the first terminal device based on the reporting granularity may be used to indicate the phase of the channel corresponding to the reporting granularity.
  • the first terminal device may measure the first downlink channel based on the reporting granularity to obtain the corresponding report granularity.
  • the phase of the channel Therefore, from another perspective, the reporting granularity can also be referred to as the measurement granularity.
  • the reporting granularity may be a subband, for example.
  • the reporting granularity can also be other possible frequency domain granularity. This application does not limit this.
  • the reporting granularity may be pre-defined, such as a protocol; it may also be indicated by the network device through signaling in advance. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: the network device sending indication information of the reporting granularity.
  • the first terminal device receives the indication information of the reporting granularity.
  • the network device can reuse the reporting granularity of the channel measurement configuration in the existing signaling, or in other words, the reporting granularity mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can use the existing channel measurement reporting granularity.
  • the existing signaling may be a channel state information (channel state information, CSI) reporting (CSI reporting) configuration.
  • the first terminal device may indicate the phase of the first downlink channel in many ways.
  • the protocol may predefine a codebook
  • the codebook may include M 1 (M 1 > 1, and is an integer) codewords
  • the phase of the M 1 codewords may be between 0 and 2 ⁇ Divide equally within the range.
  • the codebook may include the following M 1 codewords:
  • the phases of the M 1 codewords are 0 respectively, It can be seen that the phase of the M 1 codewords is equally divided into M 1 parts in the range of 0 to 2 ⁇ . Each codeword can correspond to a phase.
  • the phase of the first downlink channel is denoted as ⁇ 1 .
  • the first terminal device may indicate the phase ⁇ 1 of the M 1 code words with the same or the closest phase to ⁇ 1.
  • the codeword whose phase is the same as or closest to ⁇ 1 may be referred to as the codeword corresponding to the phase ⁇ 1 of the first downlink channel.
  • the first terminal device is determined from a codebook ⁇ phase during a corresponding codeword, i.e. the process of determining the phase quantized value of 1 ⁇ .
  • the first terminal device may indicate the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1 through the first channel information.
  • the first terminal device may be determined from the M 1 codewords out of phase with the first downlink channel angle ⁇ 1 is the smallest code word, the code word as the first The quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1 of the channel information is indicated.
  • the first terminal device can indicate the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1 in many ways.
  • the protocol may predefine a one-to-one correspondence between the M 1 codewords and M 1 indexes.
  • the M 1 indexes may be m 1 in the aforementioned M 1 codewords, for example.
  • the first terminal device may carry the index m 1 of the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1 in the first channel information to indicate the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1.
  • This application does not limit the specific value of the number of codewords M 1 in the codebook. It can be understood that the larger the value of M 1 , the finer the granularity of the angle division, and the more accurate the indication of the phase ⁇ 1 will be.
  • step 202 the network device determines the first precoding.
  • the first precoding is a scalar, and therefore may be referred to as scalar precoding.
  • the first precoding can be used to precode the first uplink signal after BPSK, and the first uplink signal can be transmitted through the first uplink channel.
  • the first precoding may rotate the phase of the first uplink channel in a process of precoding the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal. Since the precoding operation is to precode the modulation symbols after BPSK, that is, to precode the constellation obtained by BPSK, the precoding operation can be called constellation precoding (CP).
  • CP constellation precoding
  • the received signal r of the precoded first uplink signal by the network device can be expressed as:
  • x 1 represents the first precoding
  • ⁇ 1 represents the phase of the first precoding
  • the network device may determine the phase of the first precoding based on the phase of the first uplink channel, and then determine the first precoding.
  • the first precoding thus determined is scalar precoding, and precoding is achieved by rotating the phase of the channel.
  • the constellation precoding proposed in this application has lower complexity and simpler operation.
  • multiple terminal devices may use the same time-frequency resources to communicate with the same network device.
  • the time-frequency resource corresponding to the first uplink channel may also be transmitted with other uplink channels, such as the second uplink channel.
  • the second uplink channel may transmit uplink signals of other terminal equipment, such as the second uplink signal from the second terminal equipment.
  • the received signal obtained by the network device can be expressed as:
  • h 2 represents the second uplink channel
  • ⁇ 2 represents the amplitude of the second uplink channel
  • ⁇ 2 represents the phase of the second uplink channel
  • x 2 represents the second precoding
  • s 2 represents the second uplink signal.
  • the interference caused by the second uplink signal can be eliminated through the design of the first precoding.
  • the network device In BPSK modulation, the network device only needs to detect the real part of the original modulation symbol. In this way, when using matched filter (MF) detection, it can be found that the real part y of the signal detected by MF can be expressed as:
  • Re() represents the real part. Indicates the interference caused by the transmission of the second uplink signal. Therefore, as long as the interference is reduced, the reception quality of the first uplink signal can be improved.
  • the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding may be designed to be in the range of ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding based on the phase of the first uplink channel and the phase of the second uplink channel.
  • the phase of the first uplink channel may be replaced by the phase of the first downlink channel based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels.
  • the phase of the second uplink channel can also be replaced by the phase of the second downlink channel. If the phase of the second downlink channel is denoted as ⁇ 2 . Then the above formula can be further extended to:
  • the cosine function is a periodic function that circulates in the range of 0 to 2 ⁇
  • the above ⁇ /2 can be understood as an odd multiple of ⁇ /2, or the left or right side of the above formula can be either Extend within the range of integer multiples of ⁇ 2 ⁇ .
  • the method 200 further includes: step 203: the network device obtains the phase of the second uplink channel or the phase of the second downlink channel.
  • the second uplink channel may be, for example, an uplink channel between the network device and the second terminal device.
  • the second downlink channel may be, for example, a downlink channel between the network device and the second terminal device. Since both the second downlink channel and the second uplink channel are the channels between the second terminal device and the network device, they can be implemented through, for example, frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD). ) And other communication modes to realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals. Therefore, it can be considered that the second uplink channel corresponds to the second downlink channel.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • TDD time division duplexing
  • the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel is the same as the frequency of the second downlink channel on which the second terminal device measures. There is overlap in domain resources.
  • the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel.
  • the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel.
  • the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel is the same as the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel. This is because the measurement result of the second downlink channel by the second terminal device is more suitable for determining the second precoding within the range of the measured frequency domain resources, and the determined second precoding can also be more suitable for the second uplink channel. match.
  • the specific implementation manner of the network device performing step 203 may be similar to the specific implementation manner of the network device performing step 201.
  • the network device may obtain the phase of the second uplink channel based on the measurement of the uplink channel, or receive the second channel from the second terminal device. Information to obtain the phase of the downlink channel. Since these two implementations have been described in detail in step 201 above, for the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the network device obtains the phase of the first downlink channel as ⁇ 1 in step 201 and obtains the phase of the second downlink channel as ⁇ 2 in step 203.
  • the network device may determine the phase of the first precoding based on the acquired phases ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 , and then determine the first precoding.
  • phase ⁇ 1 of the first downlink channel can be replaced with the phase ⁇ 1 of the first uplink channel
  • phase ⁇ 2 of the second downlink channel can be replaced with the second uplink channel.
  • the phase ⁇ 2 will not expand on each case one by one.
  • the network device may directly determine the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding based on the phase ⁇ 1 of the first uplink channel.
  • the network device may have failed to obtain the phase of the second uplink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel in a recent period of time.
  • the value of ⁇ 2 or ⁇ 2 can be estimated based on one or more previous measurements on the second uplink channel, or one or more previous measurements on the second downlink channel, and then the value of ⁇ 2 or ⁇ 2 can be determined from ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ /2 or ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2 or ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2 or ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2 to determine the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding.
  • the network device may further determine a second precoding, and the second precoding may be used to precode the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal.
  • the second uplink signal and the first uplink signal can be transmitted through the same time-frequency resource, that is, the first uplink channel used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink channel used to transmit the second uplink signal.
  • the channel overlaps, and the phase of the second precoding is denoted as ⁇ 2 , for example, and the received signal r'obtained by the network device can be expressed as:
  • h 2 represents the second uplink channel
  • ⁇ 2 represents the amplitude of the second uplink channel
  • ⁇ 2 represents the phase of the second uplink channel
  • x 2 represents the second uplink signal
  • s 2 represents the second uplink signal
  • ⁇ 2 represents the first uplink signal.
  • Two precoding phase As mentioned earlier, ⁇ 1 in the formula can be replaced by ⁇ 1 , and ⁇ 2 can be replaced by ⁇ 2 .
  • the network device can eliminate the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal by designing the first precoding and the second precoding, so as to achieve the effect of improving the reception quality.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 204, the network device determines the second precoding.
  • the network equipment In BPSK modulation, the network equipment only needs to detect the real part of the original modulation symbol, so when using matched filter (match filter, MF) detection, if the first uplink signal is taken as an example, the real part y of the signal detected by MF can be Expressed as:
  • Re() represents the real part. Indicates the interference caused by the transmission of the second uplink signal. Therefore, as long as the interference is reduced, the reception quality of the first uplink signal can be improved.
  • the network device can control the difference ⁇ 2- ⁇ 1 between the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 to ⁇ 2 - ⁇ by designing the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2. Within the range of 1 ⁇ /2.
  • the network device may be determined according to the value of ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 of.
  • the network device may determine the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 based on the phase ⁇ 1 of the first uplink channel and the phase ⁇ 2 of the second uplink channel. That is, the above step 204 and step 202 can be combined into one step to be executed, and the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding at the same time.
  • the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding is 0, and the phase ⁇ 2 of the second precoding is ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2.
  • phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding is ⁇ /2
  • phase ⁇ 2 of the second precoding is ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 .
  • phase ⁇ 2 of the second precoding is 0, and the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding is ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2.
  • phase ⁇ 2 of the second precoding is ⁇ /2
  • phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding is ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 .
  • phase of one of the first precoding and the second precoding is designed to be 0, it is equivalent to not performing the precoding operation on one of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal.
  • One of the terminal devices does not perform the precoding operation, for example, the phase of the second precoding is 0, then the second terminal device may not perform the precoding operation on the second uplink signal, but only the first terminal device needs to perform the precoding operation on the second uplink signal.
  • the precoding operation of an uplink signal can eliminate the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal.
  • the network device may also design the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 to be non-zero values, which is not limited in this application.
  • step 205 the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
  • the first terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the protocol may predefine a codebook, which may include M 2 (M 2 >1, and is an integer) codewords, and the phase of the M 2 codewords may be between 0 and 2 ⁇ Divide equally within the range.
  • the codebook may include the following M 2 codewords:
  • the phases of the M 2 codewords are 0 respectively, It can be seen that the phases of the M 2 codewords are equally divided into M 2 parts in the range of 0 to 2 ⁇ . Each codeword can correspond to a phase.
  • the network device may determine the codeword that is the same as or closest to the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding from the M 2 codewords of the codebook, and determine the codeword as the phase ⁇ 1 of the first precoding. Corresponding code word.
  • the network device determines from the codebook beta] phase with a procedure corresponding codeword, i.e. the process of determining the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1. Indicate that the network device may be quantized values of the phase ⁇ 1 is the first indication information.
  • the protocol may predefine the one-to-one correspondence between the M 2 codewords and the M 2 indexes.
  • the M 2 indexes may be, for example, m 2 in the above M 2 codewords.
  • the network device may carry the index of the quantized phase values ⁇ 1 in the first indication information to indicate a quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1.
  • the network device can also indicate the quantized value of the phase ⁇ 1 through a bitmap with a length of M 2.
  • the M 2 bits in the bitmap correspond to M 2 codewords one-to-one.
  • the quantized values to indicate the phase is beta] 1 by the bit map, for example, in the bit position of the selected code word corresponding to "1", while the other bit positions "0.”
  • This application does not limit the specific value of the value M 2 of the number of codewords in the codebook. It can be understood that the larger the value of M 2 , the finer the granularity of the angle division, and the more accurate the indication of the phase ⁇ 1 will be.
  • M 2 is the same as M 1.
  • the codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding may be codebooks with the same accuracy.
  • a possible situation is that the codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding are the same codebook. In this case, the network equipment and the terminal equipment can complete the channel phase and precoding phase indications through the same codebook, which can save storage space.
  • M 2 is different from M 1.
  • the codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding may be codebooks with different precisions. In this case, each codebook can be designed separately based on different requirements for accuracy.
  • the network device may further indicate the first precoding to the first terminal device based on the precoding granularity.
  • the precoding granularity may refer to the granularity based on precoding the uplink signal.
  • it may be the granularity on which the first terminal device precodes the first uplink signal in this embodiment.
  • the precoding granularity may be, for example, a precoding resource block group (precoding resource block group), or a subband, and so on.
  • the precoding granularity may also be other possible frequency domain granularity, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 206, the network device sends indication information of precoding granularity.
  • the first terminal device receives the indication information of the precoding granularity.
  • the precoding granularity is predefined.
  • the protocol may predefine the precoding granularity.
  • the network device may indicate one precoding for a block of resources with a precoding granularity. Assuming that the resources scheduled by the network device can be divided into multiple blocks of resources based on the precoding granularity, the network device can indicate the precoding corresponding to the multiple blocks of resources. In other words, when the network device indicates the first precoding through the first indication information, it may indicate multiple precodings corresponding to the precoding granularity.
  • the network device's indication of multiple precodings may refer to the method described above, for example, to indicate the corresponding codeword for each precoding in turn.
  • the index of the quantization value is used to indicate, or the bitmap is used to indicate.
  • the network device may also indicate multiple precodings corresponding to the multiple blocks of resources in a differential manner.
  • the precoding corresponding to one of the multiple resources is indicated by the above-mentioned method, and the other precoding is indicated by the difference component.
  • the network device indicates the precoding 1 corresponding to resource 1 through the index or bitmap of the quantization value, and precoding corresponding to the remaining resources 2 to resource N, Indicate the difference between the phase of each precoding and the phase of precoding 1 respectively. Thereby, the effect of reducing feedback overhead can be achieved.
  • precoding granularity and the reporting granularity may be the same or different. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding corresponding to the precoding granularity according to the acquired phase of the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to the reporting granularity .
  • the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity)
  • a precoding granularity may be an integer multiple or a non-integer multiple of a reporting granularity.
  • the network device may determine the first precoding according to the acquired multiple phases of the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity).
  • a precoding granularity is s 1 , such as including s 1 RB;
  • a reporting granularity (or measurement granularity) is s 2 , such as including s 2 RBs, s 1 >s 2 .
  • the network device can calculate the corresponding piece of resource Phase, determine the first precoding. in, Indicates rounding up. Should The first phase may be the phase of the first uplink channel or the phase of the first downlink channel.
  • the network device can calculate the The average value of the two phases, and then determine the first precoding phase based on the average value, or the network device can be based on Each of the two phases determines a pre-encoded phase, which in turn determines The average value of the pre-encoded phases is used as the first pre-encoded phase.
  • network equipment can also be based on Any one of the two phases determines the first precoding.
  • the first precoding determined by the above example is determined based on more channel information, and therefore may be more able to adapt to this block resource.
  • the network device can use the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to this block of resources.
  • the phase is used to determine the first precoding corresponding to this block resource.
  • the method 200 further includes: step 207, the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, and the modulation mode for the first uplink signal includes BPSK or ⁇ . /2-BPSK.
  • the first terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the modulation mode for the first uplink signal is predefined.
  • the protocol can predefine what modulation method is used for the uplink signal.
  • step 206 can be omitted.
  • BPSK can express 0 and 1 through two phases.
  • ⁇ /2-BPSK means that the phase of the modulated signal of BPSK is shifted by ⁇ /2 when the odd-numbered bit of the sequence is in the sequence, and the phase of the even-numbered bit of the sequence is the same as that of BPSK, that is, 0 and 1 are represented by four phases.
  • the network device can determine and indicate the first precoding and the second precoding according to the formula listed above, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device can Based on the instructions of the network equipment respectively, the mutual interference between the two is eliminated through the precoding operation.
  • first uplink channel and the second uplink channel may also partially overlap.
  • first uplink channel and the second uplink channel partially overlap in the time domain and/or frequency domain. This application does not limit this.
  • the frequency domain resources of the first uplink channel may fall on Within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel
  • the frequency domain resources of the second uplink channel may fall within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, thereby facilitating obtaining the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel adapted to the second uplink channel.
  • the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
  • Figure 3 shows the first uplink channel, the second uplink channel, and the corresponding measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel.
  • the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel are shaded in the figure. Since the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel occupy the same time-frequency resources, they are the same block of resources in the figure.
  • the first uplink channel is an uplink transmission resource that can be used by the first terminal device to transmit the first uplink signal
  • the second uplink channel is an uplink transmission resource that can be used by the second terminal device to transmit the second uplink signal.
  • the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel corresponding to the first uplink channel is shown in measurement bandwidth 1 in the figure
  • the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel corresponding to the second uplink channel is shown in measurement bandwidth 2 in the figure. Since the first uplink channel falls in the measurement bandwidth 1 and the second uplink channel falls in the measurement bandwidth 2, the measurement bandwidth 1 and the measurement bandwidth 2 are at least in the frequency domain resources of the first uplink channel (or the second uplink channel). Overlap. It should be understood that the figures shown in the figure are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, measurement bandwidth 1 and measurement bandwidth 2 can also be completely overlapped.
  • the network device may further indicate the second precoding to the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: step 208, the network device sends fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second precoding.
  • the second terminal device receives the fourth indication information.
  • the specific process of the network device indicating the second precoding to the second terminal device through the fourth indication information is similar to the specific process of step 205 described above, because the specific process has been described in detail in step 205 above. For the sake of brevity, I won't repeat them here.
  • the phase of the second precoding is a predefined value.
  • the predefined value is 0 or ⁇ /2.
  • the predefined value may be predefined by a protocol, or determined through pre-negotiation between the network device and the terminal device, for example.
  • the network device may not indicate the second precoding.
  • Step 208 may be omitted, and the network device may indicate the first precoding to the first terminal device through step 205.
  • the predefined value may also be instructed by the network device to the second terminal device through step 208. This application does not limit this.
  • the method further includes: step 209, the network device sends indication information of precoding granularity.
  • the second terminal device receives the indication information of the precoding granularity.
  • the network device can notify each terminal device in the cell of the precoding granularity through the same signaling.
  • the above step 206 and step 209 can be combined into one step to be executed.
  • the network device may also indicate the precoding granularity to each terminal device through different signaling.
  • the above step 206 and step 209 can be performed as two independent steps.
  • the precoding granularity may be predefined. In this case, the above steps 206 and 209 can be omitted.
  • the method further includes: step 210, the network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the modulation mode for the second uplink signal, and the modulation mode for the second uplink signal is BPSK or ⁇ / 2-BPSK.
  • the second terminal device receives the fifth indication information.
  • the network device can notify the first terminal device and the second terminal device of the modulation mode for the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal in the same signaling.
  • the signaling is sent by multicast.
  • the above step 207 and step 210 can be combined into one step to be executed.
  • the network equipment may also indicate to each terminal equipment the modulation mode of the respective uplink signal through different signaling.
  • the above step 207 and step 210 can be performed as two independent steps.
  • the modulation method for the uplink signal can also be predefined. Therefore, the above steps 207 and 210 can also be omitted.
  • a possible design is that the modulation mode of the first uplink signal by the first terminal device is the same as the modulation mode of the second uplink signal by the second terminal device.
  • the network device receives the first uplink signal in the first uplink channel.
  • the phase and the phase of the second uplink channel are unchanged, and in the received signal of the second uplink signal by the network device, the phase of the first uplink channel and the phase of the second uplink channel are also unchanged. Therefore, the network device may determine the first precoding and the second precoding based on the formulas listed above.
  • the ⁇ /2-BPSK performs BPSK on the signal
  • the phase of the subsequent modulation symbol is deflected.
  • the symbol after ⁇ /2-BPSK is denoted as z n
  • the symbol after BPSK is denoted as d n
  • z n j n ⁇ d n .
  • the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal after ⁇ /2-BPSK is deflected by ⁇ /2 compared to the modulation symbol after BPSK, and the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal after ⁇ /2-BPSK is greater than the modulation symbol after BPSK. Also deflected by ⁇ /2.
  • the two can cancel each other, so the phases of the first precoding and the second precoding can still satisfy the above formula.
  • the difference ⁇ 2- ⁇ 1 between the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 should be infinitely close to ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2 is fine.
  • the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment may perform ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal on the same RE.
  • the phase of the subsequent modulation symbol is different from that of the BPSK modulation symbol.
  • the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal is rotated by ⁇ /2
  • the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal is rotated by ⁇ , and the two cannot cancel each other.
  • the difference ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 between the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 should be infinitely close to ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 or infinitely close It is sufficient to be within ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ .
  • the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are modulated by ⁇ /2-BPSK on the same RE.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol rotation after BPSK is different.
  • the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal is rotated by ⁇ /2
  • the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal is rotated by 3 ⁇ /2, and the two cannot cancel each other.
  • the difference ⁇ 2- ⁇ 1 between the first precoding phase ⁇ 1 and the second precoding phase ⁇ 2 should be infinitely close to ⁇ 2 - ⁇ 1 ⁇ /2 That's it.
  • the network device only needs to know the modulation method for the first uplink signal and the modulation method for the second uplink in advance.
  • the modulation mode is ⁇ /2-BPSK
  • the phase rotation angle of the modulation symbol on each RE can be modified based on the formula listed above to determine the phase sum of the first precoding The phase of the second precoding. Therefore, even if different modulation methods are used for the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, for example, one uses BPSK and the other uses ⁇ /2-BPSK, the phase of the first precoding and the first precoding can still be determined based on the same concept. Two precoding phase.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal may be restricted.
  • the phase of a certain designated RE on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal is restricted to ⁇ /2 or - ⁇ /2.
  • the phase of the first RE on the time-frequency resource is ⁇ /2 or - ⁇ /2.
  • phase deflection angles of the two uplink signals are the same and can cancel each other.
  • the network device may still determine the phase of the first precoding and the phase of the second precoding based on the formulas listed above.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and/or the second uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling.
  • the method further includes: step 211, the network device sends third indication information, the third indication information indicating the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the first uplink signal.
  • the first terminal device receives the third indication information.
  • the method further includes: step 212, the network device sends sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the second uplink signal.
  • the second terminal device receives the sixth indication information.
  • the network device can notify the first terminal device and the second terminal device of the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK in the same signaling.
  • the above step 211 and step 212 can be combined into one step to be executed.
  • the network device may also indicate to each terminal device the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK through different signaling.
  • the above-mentioned step 211 and step 212 can be performed as two independent steps.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the uplink signal is a predefined value.
  • the protocol can predefine the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the uplink signal. That is, the direction of the above offset may be predefined by the protocol.
  • the protocol predefines the phase on a specified RE as ⁇ /2, or the protocol predefines the phase on a specified RE as - ⁇ /2.
  • step 211 and step 212 can be omitted. It should be understood that this application does not limit the specific value of the predefined value.
  • the network device indicates the modulation mode to the first terminal device through the second indication information, and indicates the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after ⁇ /2-BPSK is performed through the third indication information
  • the second indication information and the third indication may be information carried in the same signaling or information carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the fifth indication information and the sixth indication information may be It is the information carried in the same signaling, or it may be the information carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network equipment can also indicate the modulation mode for the first uplink signal and the modulation mode for the second uplink signal through the same signaling, and the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after ⁇ /2-BPSK. That is, the foregoing second indication information, second indication information, fifth indication information, and sixth indication information may be carried in the same signaling.
  • the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing ⁇ /2-BPSK on the uplink signal may be a predefined value.
  • the terminal device can directly The predefined value determines the phase of the modulation symbol.
  • step 213 the first terminal device precodes the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal to obtain the precoded first uplink signal; and in step 214, sends the first uplink signal through the first uplink channel.
  • the network device receives the precoded first uplink signal.
  • step 215 the second terminal device precodes the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal to obtain the precoded second uplink signal; and in step 216, transmits the second uplink signal through the second uplink channel.
  • the network device receives the precoded second uplink signal.
  • the process for the first terminal device to send the first uplink signal to the network device through the first uplink channel and the process for the second terminal device to send the second uplink signal to the network device through the second uplink channel can refer to the prior art. For brevity, this article Do not elaborate.
  • the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced.
  • the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
  • the precoding can be determined for the transmission of the two uplink signals based on the phase of the uplink channel or the downlink channel.
  • One of the two uplink signals after precoding is Interference between them can be eliminated, which is beneficial for network equipment to obtain better reception quality, and is beneficial for improving system transmission performance.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations.
  • each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be the first terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system) configured in the first terminal device. Wait).
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the first terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2 .
  • the units in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to perform step 213 in the method 200
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to perform step 201b, step 205 to step 207, and step 207 in the method 200.
  • Step 211 and step 214 It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be the first terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system) configured in the first terminal device. Wait).
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the second terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the second terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2 .
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 215 in the method 200
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 203, step 208 to step 210, and step 203 of the method 200. 212 and step 216. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the one shown in FIG. 5
  • the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 or the transceiver 3020 in the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6, the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to The processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 or the processor 3010 in the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may use an input/output interface
  • the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a processor, a microprocessor, or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • a component such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 201a, 202 to step 204 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 201b, 201b, and 204 in the method 200.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 5 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 7
  • the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 5 or the processor 2010 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 4200 or the processor 4202 in the base station 4000 is output.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, a transceiver 2020, and a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2020, and the memory 2030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path.
  • the memory 2030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 2010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2030 to control the transceiver 2020 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 2030 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory.
  • the memory 2030 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2030, and when the processor 2010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 2010 is used to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 is the first terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 is the second terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication device 2000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 2020 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may be devices integrated on different chips.
  • the processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 2020 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip.
  • the processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
  • the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and so on.
  • the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
  • the transceiver 2020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and so on.
  • the transceiver 2020, the processor 2010 and the memory 2020 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 3000 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 3000 includes a processor 3010 and a transceiver 3020.
  • the terminal device 3000 further includes a memory 3030.
  • the processor 3010, the transceiver 3020, and the memory 3030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 3030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 3010 is used to download from the memory 3030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 3020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 3000 may further include an antenna 3040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 3020 through a wireless signal.
  • the foregoing processor 3010 and the memory 3030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 3010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 3030 to implement the foregoing functions.
  • the memory 3030 may also be integrated in the processor 3010 or independent of the processor 3010.
  • the processor 3010 may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 4 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 5.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 3020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 4 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 5.
  • the transceiver 3020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6 can implement various processes involving the terminal device (for example, the foregoing first terminal device or the second terminal device) in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 3010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 3000 may further include a power supply 3050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 3000 may also include one or more of the input unit 3060, the display unit 3070, the audio circuit 3080, the camera 3090, and the sensor 3100.
  • the audio circuit may also include a speaker 3082, a microphone 3084, and so on.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 4000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 4100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 4200.
  • RRU 4100 may be called a transceiver unit, and may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 4 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 5.
  • the RRU 4100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 4101 and a radio frequency unit 4102.
  • the RRU 4100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 4100 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 4200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, and so on.
  • the RRU 4100 and the BBU 4200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 4200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 4 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 5, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding and multiplexing , Modulation, spread spectrum and so on.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 4200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 4200 further includes a memory 4201 and a processor 4202.
  • the memory 4201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 4202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 4201 and the processor 4202 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 7 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 4000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 4200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 7 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment.
  • it may include AAU, it may also include CU and/or DU, or it may include BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; it may also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or it may be
  • AAU adaptive radio unit
  • BBU BBU
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions.
  • the present application also provides a processing device, including at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing device executes the first terminal device, the first terminal device in any one of the foregoing method embodiments, and the The method executed by the second terminal device or network device.
  • the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled with the processor.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processor is used to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing device executes the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the first terminal device in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the method performed by the network device.
  • each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code.
  • the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the program shown in FIG. 2
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned first terminal device and second terminal device and one or more network devices.
  • the network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments.
  • the processing unit executes the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
  • the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are an uplink signal transmission method and a communication apparatus, which are used to reduce the complexity of precoding operations. The method comprises: a terminal device generating first channel information and sending same to a network device, wherein the first channel information is used for indicating the phase of a first downlink channel, the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained on the basis of the measurement of the first downlink channel, and can be used for determining a first precode, and the first precode is used for precoding a modulation symbol of a first uplink signal. The first precode determined thereby is a scalar, and can be used for precoding a constellation diagram obtained after modulation. Compared with a traditional precoding operation of performing weighting processing on signals of transmitting antenna ports, the processing complexity is lower and the operation is simpler. On the same time-frequency resource, or when there are two uplink signals transmitted in the same measurement range, mutual interference can also be eliminated by means of executing the precoding operations on the two uplink signals respectively.

Description

一种用于传输上行信号的方法和通信装置Method and communication device for transmitting uplink signal 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种用于传输上行信号的方法和通信装置。This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a method and communication device for transmitting uplink signals.
背景技术Background technique
多用户多输入多输出(multi-user multi-input multi-output,MU-MIMO)能够支持网络设备与多个终端设备之间使用相同的时频资源传输不同的数据。但是,当多个终端设备使用相同的时频资源向同一网络设备传输上行信号时,各终端设备传输的数据之间可能会相互干扰,从而影响网络设备对上行信号的接收。Multi-user multi-input multi-output (MU-MIMO) can support the use of the same time-frequency resource to transmit different data between a network device and multiple terminal devices. However, when multiple terminal devices use the same time-frequency resource to transmit uplink signals to the same network device, the data transmitted by each terminal device may interfere with each other, thereby affecting the network device's reception of the uplink signal.
通常情况下,终端设备可以通过预编码来减小多用户之间的干扰。要执行预编码操作,通常需要根据测量所得的信道矩阵确定预编码矩阵,进而通过预编码矩阵对各个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理来实现。因此对于终端设备来说,处理的复杂度较高。Generally, terminal equipment can reduce interference among multiple users through precoding. To perform the precoding operation, it is usually necessary to determine the precoding matrix based on the measured channel matrix, and then perform weighting processing on the signals of each transmit antenna port through the precoding matrix. Therefore, the processing complexity is relatively high for the terminal device.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种用于传输上行信号的方法和通信装置,以期降低终端设备的预编码操作的复杂度。The present application provides a method and communication device for transmitting uplink signals, in order to reduce the complexity of the precoding operation of terminal equipment.
第一方面,提供了一种用于传输上行信号的方法。该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不做限定。In the first aspect, a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided. The method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
该方法包括:生成第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位;所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;所述第一下行信道的相位用于确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控(binary phase shift keying,BPSK)调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;发送所述第一信道信息。The method includes: generating first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of a first downlink channel; the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on the measurement of the first downlink channel; The phase of the first downlink channel is used to determine the first precoding, and the first precoding is used to precode modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include binary phase shift keying (binary phase shift keying). shift keying, BPSK) symbols obtained by modulation, or symbols obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation; sending the first channel information.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以基于第一下行信道的相位确定与第一上行信道适配的第一预编码,由此而确定的第一预编码为标量,该第一预编码可用于对第一上行信号的调制符号的星座图进行相位旋转,以此来实现预编码的操作。因此,相比于通过预编码矩阵对多个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理的预编码操作而言,大大简化了预编码操作,降低了终端设备的处理复杂度。同时,利用了上下行信道的互易性,网络设备可以利用终端设备反馈的第一下行信道的信息,来确定与第一上行信道适配的预编码,网络设备确定预编码的过程也得以简化,计算量大大减少。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced. At the same time, taking advantage of the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一信道信息指示所述第一下行信道的相位在预定义的M 1个码字中所对应的码字,其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均分,M 1为大于1的整数。 Binding a first aspect, some possible implementations of the first aspect, the phase of the first channel information indicating the first downlink channel in a predefined codewords M 1 corresponding to the codeword, Wherein, the phases of the M 1 codewords are equally divided in the range of 0 to 2π, and M 1 is an integer greater than 1.
即,通过预定义码本,将0至2π均匀地划分为M 1个角度,该M 1个角度对应于码本中M 1个码字。终端设备对下行信道的相位的指示具体可以是对该码本中对应的码字的指示。因此,指示开销较小。 That is, through a predefined codebook, 0 to 2π are evenly divided into M 1 angles, and the M 1 angles correspond to M 1 codewords in the codebook. The indication of the phase of the downlink channel by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead is small.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码;基于所述第一预编码对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,得到预编码后的第一上行信号;通过第一上行信道发送所述预编码后的第一上行信号。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding; A precoding precodes the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal to obtain a precoded first uplink signal; and sends the precoded first uplink signal through the first uplink channel.
终端设备基于网络设备所指示的第一预编码,对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,也即,对第一上行信号进行调制所得到的星座图进行相位旋转,进而获得预编码后的第一上行信号。由此可以降低预编码复杂度,并且有利于减小干扰,提高对第一上行信号的接收性能。The terminal device precodes the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal based on the first precoding indicated by the network device, that is, performs phase rotation on the constellation diagram obtained by modulating the first uplink signal to obtain the precoded The first uplink signal. Therefore, the precoding complexity can be reduced, and interference can be reduced, and the receiving performance of the first uplink signal can be improved.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一预编码基于预定义的M 2个码字确定;其中,所述M 2个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均布,M 2为大于1的整数;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述M 2个码字中与所述第一预编码对应的码字。 With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the first precoding is determined based on predefined M 2 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 2 codewords is between 0 and 2π Evenly distributed in the range, M 2 is an integer greater than 1; the second indication information is used to indicate the code word corresponding to the first precoding among the M 2 code words.
即,通过预定义码本,将0至2π均匀地划分为M 2个角度,该M 2个角度对应于码本中M 2个码字。终端设备对第一预编码的指示具体可以是对该码本中对应的码字的指示。因此,网络设备对第一预编码的指示开销较小。 That is, through a predefined codebook, 0 to 2π are evenly divided into M 2 angles, and the M 2 angles correspond to M 2 codewords in the codebook. The indication of the first precoding by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead of the first precoding by the network device is relatively small.
可选地,M 1与M 2相同。此情况下,对第一预编码的指示和对第一信道信息的指示可以共用同一个码本。 Optionally, M 1 and M 2 are the same. In this case, the indication of the first precoding and the indication of the first channel information may share the same codebook.
可选地,M 1与M 2不同。此情况下,可以根据对反馈精度的需求,配置不同精度的码本;也可以根据对预编码指示精度的需求,配置不同精度的码本。M 1与M 2可以相互解耦,对其取值的配置更为灵活。 Optionally, M 1 and M 2 are different. In this case, codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for feedback accuracy; or codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for precoding indication accuracy. M 1 and M 2 can be decoupled from each other, and the configuration of their values is more flexible.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, The modulation method includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对所述第一上行信号的调制方式是预定义的。例如,协议预定义。所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSKWith reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the modulation method for the first uplink signal is predefined. For example, the protocol is predefined. The modulation method includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK
即,对第一上行信号的调制方式可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。That is, the modulation mode for the first uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct to perform π/2 on the first uplink signal. -The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位为预定义值。例如,由协议预定义。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal is a predefined value. For example, pre-defined by the protocol.
在调制方式为π/2-BPSK的情况下,还可进一步限制对第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。该相位可以由网络设备通过信令指示,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。When the modulation mode is π/2-BPSK, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal can be further restricted. The phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,网络设备调度的同一上行资源还用于传输第二上行信号,所述第一预编码的相位还与第二下行信道的相位和/或第二预 编码的相位相关,其中,所述第二预编码用于对所述第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is also used to transmit the second uplink signal, and the phase of the first precoding is also the same as the phase of the second downlink channel. And/or the phase correlation of the second precoding, wherein the second precoding is used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal, and the second downlink channel is used for transmitting the second uplink signal. The signal corresponds to the second uplink channel.
网络设备可以结合第二下行信道的相位和/或第二预编码的相位来确定第一预编码的相位,进而确定第一预编码。The network device may determine the phase of the first precoding in combination with the phase of the second downlink channel and/or the phase of the second precoding, and then determine the first precoding.
由于网络设备调度的同一时频资源可用于传输第一上行信号和第二上行信号,二者之间可能存在相互干扰。网络设备可以通过限制第一预编码和第二预编码,可以使得第一上行信号和第二上行信号之间的相互干扰得以消除。Since the same time-frequency resource scheduled by the network device can be used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, there may be mutual interference between the two. The network device can limit the first precoding and the second precoding, so that the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal can be eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,由于网络设备可以根据第一下行信道的相位和第二下行信道的相位确定第一预编码和第二预编码,故,第一上行信道和第二上行信道的频域资源可以分别落在用于确定第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽的范围内,以使得所确定的第一预编码和第二预编码分别与第一上行信道和第二上行信道相适配。In the embodiment of the present application, since the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel, the frequency of the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel The domain resources may respectively fall within the range used to determine the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, so that the determined first precoding and second precoding are respectively the same as those of the first uplink channel and the second downlink channel. The second uplink channel is adapted.
可以理解,第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽部分或全部重叠。由于第一上行信道落在第一下行信道的测量带宽内,第二上行信道落在第二下行信道的测量带宽内,故第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽至少存在部分重叠。It can be understood that the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中,网络设备调度的同一上行资源用于所述第一上行信号和第二上行信号的传输,且所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位与所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号在同一个资源粒子(resource element,RE)上的相位相同。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is used for the transmission of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, and the second uplink signal performs π The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the /2-BPSK modulation is the same as the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the first uplink signal is modulated by π/2-BPSK on the same resource element (RE).
即,限制第一上行信号和第二上行信号在经过π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号在相同的时频资源上的旋转角度和方向一致。That is, it is restricted that the rotation angle and direction of the modulation symbols obtained after π/2-BPSK modulation of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal on the same time-frequency resource are consistent.
第二方面,提供了一种用于传输上行信号的方法。该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不做限定。In the second aspect, a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided. The method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
该方法包括:基于预编码对上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号,所述预编码的相位为0或±π/2;发送预编码后的上行信号。The method includes: precoding modulation symbols of the uplink signal based on precoding, the modulation symbols including symbols obtained by BPSK modulation, or symbols obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation, and the precoding phase is 0 Or ±π/2; Send the pre-coded uplink signal.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以基于预定义的相位确定预编码,进而对上行信号的调制符号进行预编码。由此而确定的预编码可用于对上行信号的调制符号的星座图进行相位旋转,以此来实现预编码的操作。因此,相比于通过预编码矩阵对多个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理的预编码操作而言,大大简化了预编码操作,降低了终端设备的处理复杂度。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can determine precoding based on a predefined phase, and then precode the modulation symbols of the uplink signal. The precoding thus determined can be used to perform phase rotation on the constellation diagram of the modulation symbol of the uplink signal, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced.
其中,若预编码的相位为0,则相当于对该上行信号的调制符号不执行预编码操作。若预编码的相位为±π/2,则相当于对该上行信号的调制符号的星座图顺时针方向或逆时针方向旋转了π/2。Wherein, if the phase of the precoding is 0, it is equivalent to not performing the precoding operation on the modulation symbol of the uplink signal. If the precoding phase is ±π/2, it is equivalent to a clockwise or counterclockwise rotation of the constellation diagram of the modulation symbol of the uplink signal by π/2.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收该预编码的指示信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: receiving the precoding indication information.
可选地,网络设备可以通过指示预编码的相位的方式来指示该预编码。具体指示方式可以参考前文第一方面中的相关说明,为了简洁,这里不再重复。Optionally, the network device may indicate the precoding by indicating the phase of the precoding. For specific instructions, please refer to the relevant description in the first aspect of the previous article. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,该预编码的相位为预定义值。 例如,由协议预定义。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the second aspect, the precoding phase is a predefined value. For example, pre-defined by the protocol.
在一种可能的设计中,该上行信号为第一方面或第三方面中所述的第二上行信号,该预编码为第一方面或第三方面中所述的第二预编码,该预编码的指示信息例如可以是第三方面中所述的第四指示信息。In a possible design, the uplink signal is the second uplink signal described in the first aspect or the third aspect, the precoding is the second precoding described in the first aspect or the third aspect, and the precoding is The encoded indication information may be, for example, the fourth indication information described in the third aspect.
也就是说,第一上行信号和第二上行信号传输在相同的时频资源上。对第二预编码的相位限制为0或±π/2,可以方便网络设备对第一预编码的确定。In other words, the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are transmitted on the same time-frequency resource. Limiting the phase of the second precoding to 0 or ±π/2 can facilitate the network device to determine the first precoding.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在第一方面或第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收上报粒度的指示信息,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations of the first or second aspect, the method further includes: receiving indication information of a reporting granularity, where the reporting granularity is reporting the first channel The frequency domain granularity on which the information is based.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在第一方面或第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,上报粒度为预定义值。例如由协议预定义。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect, the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
即,终端设备对第一信道信息的上报粒度可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。That is, the reporting granularity of the first channel information by the terminal device may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在第一方面或第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first or second aspect, the method further includes: receiving indication information of precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is relative to the first The frequency domain granularity on which modulation symbols of an uplink signal are pre-coded.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在第一方面或第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中,预编码粒度为预定义值。例如由协议预定义。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect, the precoding granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
即,终端设备对上行信号进行预编码所基于的粒度可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。That is, the granularity based on which the terminal device precodes the uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
可选地,预编码粒度与上报粒度相同。Optionally, the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity.
可选地,预编码粒度与上报粒度不同。Optionally, the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity.
第三方面,提供了一种用于传输上行信号的方法。该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不做限定。In the third aspect, a method for transmitting uplink signals is provided. The method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
该方法包括:接收第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位,所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;根据所述第一下行信道的相位确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码。The method includes: receiving first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate a phase of a first downlink channel, and the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on a measurement on the first downlink channel; The phase of the first downlink channel determines a first precoding, and the first precoding is used to precode modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include those obtained by binary phase shift keying BPSK modulation. Symbol, or a symbol obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation; sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以基于第一下行信道的相位确定与第一上行信道适配的第一预编码,由此而确定的第一预编码为标量,该第一预编码可用于对第一上行信号的调制符号的星座图进行相位旋转,以此来实现预编码的操作。因此,相比于通过预编码矩阵对多个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理的预编码操作而言,大大简化了预编码操作,降低了终端设备的处理复杂度。同时,利用了上下行信道的互易性,网络设备可以利用终端设备反馈的第一下行信道的信息,来确定与第一上行信道适配的预编码,网络设备确定预编码的过程也得以简化,计算量大大减少。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced. At the same time, taking advantage of the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一预编码的相位在预定义的M 2个码字中所对应的码字;其中,所述M 2个码字的相位在0 至2π范围内均布,M 2为大于1的整数。 With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the first indication information indicates the codeword corresponding to the phase of the first precoding in the predefined M 2 codewords; wherein , The phases of the M 2 codewords are uniformly distributed in the range of 0 to 2π, and M 2 is an integer greater than 1.
即,通过预定义码本,将0至2π均匀地划分为M 2个角度,该M 2个角度对应于码本中M 2个码字。终端设备对第一预编码的指示具体可以是对该码本中对应的码字的指示。因此,网络设备对第一预编码的指示开销较小。 That is, through a predefined codebook, 0 to 2π are evenly divided into M 2 angles, and the M 2 angles correspond to M 2 codewords in the codebook. The indication of the first precoding by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead of the first precoding by the network device is relatively small.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一信道的相位基于预定义的M 1个码字确定;其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均布,M 1为大于1的整数;所述第一信道信息指示所述M 1个码字中与所述第一下行信道的相位对应的码字。 With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementations of the third aspect, the phase of the first channel is determined based on predefined M 1 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 1 codewords is between 0 and Evenly distributed in the range of 2π, M 1 is an integer greater than 1, and the first channel information indicates a code word corresponding to the phase of the first downlink channel among the M 1 code words.
即,通过预定义码本,将0至2π均匀地划分为M 1个角度,该M 1个角度对应于码本中M 1个码字。终端设备对下行信道的相位的指示具体可以是对该码本中对应的码字的指示。因此,指示开销较小。 That is, through a predefined codebook, 0 to 2π are evenly divided into M 1 angles, and the M 1 angles correspond to M 1 codewords in the codebook. The indication of the phase of the downlink channel by the terminal device may specifically be an indication of the corresponding codeword in the codebook. Therefore, the instruction overhead is small.
可选地,M 1与M 2相同。此情况下,对第一预编码的指示和对第一信道信息的指示可以共用同一个码本。 Optionally, M 1 and M 2 are the same. In this case, the indication of the first precoding and the indication of the first channel information may share the same codebook.
可选地,M 1与M 2不同。此情况下,可以根据对反馈精度的需求,配置不同精度的码本;也可以根据对预编码指示精度的需求,配置不同精度的码本。M 1与M 2可以相互解耦,对其取值的配置更为灵活。 Optionally, M 1 and M 2 are different. In this case, codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for feedback accuracy; or codebooks with different accuracy can be configured according to the requirements for precoding indication accuracy. M 1 and M 2 can be decoupled from each other, and the configuration of their values is more flexible.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, The modulation method includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对第一上行信号的调制方式是预定义的。例如,协议预定义。所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSKWith reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the modulation method for the first uplink signal is predefined. For example, the protocol is predefined. The modulation method includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK
即,对第一上行信号的调制方式可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。That is, the modulation mode for the first uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct to perform π/2- on the first uplink signal. The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK modulation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位为预定义值。例如,协议预定义。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained by performing π/2-BPSK modulation on the first uplink signal is a predefined value. For example, the protocol is predefined.
在调制方式为π/2-BPSK的情况下,还可进一步限制对第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。该相位可以由网络设备通过信令指示,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。When the modulation mode is π/2-BPSK, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal can be further restricted. The phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示第二预编码,所述第二预编码用于对第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码;所述第二预编码与所述第一预编码的相位差和第二下行信道与所述第一下行信道的相位差之间的差值为±π/2,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应,所述第二上行信道与所述第一上行信道占用相同的时频资源。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second precoding, and the second precoding Used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal; the difference between the phase difference between the second precoding and the first precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel The value is ±π/2, the second downlink channel corresponds to the second uplink channel used to transmit the second uplink signal, and the second uplink channel and the first uplink channel occupy the same time-frequency resources .
即,网络设备调度的同一上行资源被用于传输第一上行信号和第二上行信号。此情况下,二者之间可能存在相互干扰。网络设备可以根据第一下行信道的相位,以及第二下行信道的相位或第二预编码的相位确定第一预编码。当第二预编码与第一预编码的相位差和第二下行信道与第一下行信道的相位差之间的差值为±π/2时,第一上行信号和第二上行信 号之间的相互干扰得以消除。That is, the same uplink resource scheduled by the network device is used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal. In this case, there may be mutual interference between the two. The network device may determine the first precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel or the phase of the second precoding. When the difference between the phase difference between the second precoding and the first precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel is ±π/2, the difference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal The mutual interference is eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,由于网络设备可以根据第一下行信道的相位和第二下行信道的相位确定第一预编码和第二预编码,故,第一上行信道和第二上行信道的频域资源可以分别落在用于确定第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽的范围内,以使得所确定的第一预编码和第二预编码分别与第一上行信道和第二上行信道相适配。In the embodiment of the present application, since the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel, the frequency of the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel The domain resources may respectively fall within the range used to determine the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, so that the determined first precoding and second precoding are respectively the same as those of the first uplink channel and the second downlink channel. The second uplink channel is adapted.
可以理解,第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽部分或全部重叠。由于第一上行信道落在第一下行信道的测量带宽内,第二上行信道落在第二下行信道的测量带宽内,故第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽至少存在部分重叠。It can be understood that the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第二信道信息,所述第二信道信息用于指示所述第二下行信道的相位。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: receiving second channel information, where the second channel information is used to indicate the phase of the second downlink channel.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第二预编码的相位为0或±π/2。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the phase of the second precoding is 0 or ±π/2.
网络设备对第二预编码的确定可以根据第二下行信道的相位确定,也可以将第二预编码的相位确定为预定义值,比如0或±π/2。The network device may determine the second precoding according to the phase of the second downlink channel, or determine the phase of the second precoding as a predefined value, such as 0 or ±π/2.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,第二预编码的相位也可以是预定义值,如协议预定义。此情况下,网络设备可以不确定和指示第二预编码。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the phase of the second precoding may also be a predefined value, such as a protocol predefined. In this case, the network device may not determine and indicate the second precoding.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示对第二上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the second uplink signal, and Modulation methods include BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对第二上行信号的调制方式是预定义的,如协议预定义。所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the modulation method for the second uplink signal is predefined, such as a protocol predefined. The modulation method includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
即,对第二上行信号的调制方式可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。That is, the modulation mode for the second uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be predefined. This application does not limit this.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示对所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: sending fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct to perform π/2 on the second uplink signal. -The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK modulation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位为预定义值。例如,协议预定义。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained by performing π/2-BPSK modulation on the first uplink signal is a predefined value. For example, the protocol is predefined.
在调制方式为π/2-BPSK的情况下,还可进一步限制对第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。该相位可以由网络设备通过信令指示,也可以是预定义的。本申请对此不作限定。When the modulation mode is π/2-BPSK, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the second uplink signal can be further restricted. The phase can be indicated by the network equipment through signaling, or it can be predefined. This application does not limit this.
进一步地,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位与所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位相同。Further, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the second uplink signal is π/2-BPSK modulated is π/2-BPSK modulated with the first uplink signal The modulation symbols obtained afterwards have the same phase.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes:
发送上报粒度的指示信息,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。Sending the indication information of the reporting granularity, where the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,上报粒度为预定义值。例如由协议预定义。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes:
发送预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。Send the indication information of the precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is the frequency domain granularity based on precoding the modulation symbols.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中,上报粒度为预定义值。例如由协议预定义。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners of the third aspect, the reporting granularity is a predefined value. For example, it is predefined by the protocol.
可选地,预编码粒度与上报粒度相同。Optionally, the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity.
可选地,预编码粒度与上报粒度不同。Optionally, the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity.
应理解,上述第一方面至第三方面中对第一上行信号和第二上行信号、第一预编码和第二预编码的限制可以对调,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the restrictions on the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, the first precoding and the second precoding in the foregoing first aspect to the third aspect can be reversed, which is not limited in this application.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,或终端设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第一和第二方面以及第一和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a terminal device or a component in the terminal device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the methods in the first and second aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first and second aspects.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一和第二方面以及第一和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息,所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in any one of the foregoing first and second aspects and the first and second aspects. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是网络设备,或网络设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面以及第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a network device or a component in the network device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the third aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第三方面以及第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息,所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the third aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a network device. When the communication device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或 逻辑电路。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device. When the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin, or a related circuit. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
第八方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行上述第一至第三方面以及第一至第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit, and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the above-mentioned first to third aspects and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to third aspects In the method.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第九方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括通信接口和处理器。所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合。所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行第一至第三方面以及第一至第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a communication interface and a processor. The communication interface is coupled with the processor. The communication interface is used to input and/or output information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data. The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing device executes the method in any one of the first to third aspects and the first to third aspects.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
第十方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以使得所述装置执行第一至第三方面以及第一至第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so that the device can execute any one of the first to third aspects and the first to third aspects. The method in the implementation mode.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的信息交互过程,例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收指示信息可以为向处理器输入接收到的指示信息的过程。具体地,处理输出的信息可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入信息可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related information interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving instruction information may be a process of inputting received instruction information to the processor. Specifically, the information output by the processing may be output to the transmitter, and the input information received by the processor may come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第九方面和第十方面中的装置可以是芯片,该处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The devices in the ninth and tenth aspects described above may be chips, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory. The memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一至第三方面以及第一至第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the first to the first The method in any one of the three aspects and the first to third aspects.
第十二方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一至第三方面以及第一至第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, and the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first to the first The method in any one of the three aspects and the first to third aspects.
第十三方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的终端设备和网络设备。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的用于传输上行信号的方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting uplink signals according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3示出了同一个测量带宽内的两块上行传输资源;Figure 3 shows two blocks of uplink transmission resources in the same measurement bandwidth;
图4和图5是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;4 and 5 are schematic block diagrams of communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5 th Generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio access technology,NR)或者下一代通信,比如6G。其中,5G移动通信系统可以是非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)或独立组网(standalone,SA)。 The technical solution provided in this application can be applied to a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, an LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, an LTE time division duplex (TDD), a general mobile communication system (universal mobile telecommunication system, UMTS) , worldwide Interoperability for microwave access (worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX ) communication system, the fifth generation (5 th Generation, 5G) mobile communication system or a new radio access technology (new radio access technology , NR) or next-generation communications, such as 6G. Among them, the 5G mobile communication system can be non-standalone (NSA) or standalone (SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、机器间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-machine,LTE-M)、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式统称为车到其他设备(vehicle to X,V2X,X可以代表任何事物),例如,该V2X可以包括:车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device to device (device to device, D2D) networks , Machine to Machine (M2M) network, Internet of Things (IoT) network or other networks. Among them, the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as vehicle-to-other devices (vehicle-to-X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication. Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代(6 th Generation,6G)移动通信系统等。本申请对此不作限定。 The technical solution provided herein can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6 th Generation, 6G), mobile communication systems. This application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),或者下一代通信6G系统中的基站等。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function. This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR , The gNB in the system, or the transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, Such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in the next-generation communication 6G system.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
网络设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与小区进行通信,该小区可以属于宏基站(例如,宏eNB或宏gNB等),也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It may also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell, where the small cell may include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。In the embodiments of the present application, terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例可以为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑(如笔记本电脑、掌上电脑等)、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or terminal equipment in the public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future.
其中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。Among them, wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,终端设备还可以是物联网(Internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band,NB)技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband (NB) technology.
此外,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc. The main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先以图1中示出的通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。图1是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统100的示意图。如图所示,该无线通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备111,该无线通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备121至终端设备124。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, first, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example to describe in detail the communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 111 shown in FIG. 1, and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal devices 121 to 121 shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 124.
各通信设备,比如图1中的网络设备111和各终端设备121至124,均可以配置多个天线。每个通信设备所配置的多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外,各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此,网络设备与终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。Each communication device, such as the network device 111 and each terminal device 121 to 124 in FIG. 1, can be configured with multiple antennas. The multiple antennas configured for each communication device may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. In addition, each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
图中虽未示出,但可以理解,该通信系统100还可以包括其他数量的终端设备。例如,该通信系统100中还可以包括更多的终端设备。更多的终端设备可以直接地与网络设备111通信;也可以间接地与网络设备111通信,例如经由图中所示的终端设备121至终端设备124中的一个与网络设备通信。本申请对此不作限定。Although not shown in the figure, it can be understood that the communication system 100 may also include other numbers of terminal devices. For example, the communication system 100 may also include more terminal devices. More terminal devices can directly communicate with the network device 111; they can also communicate with the network device 111 indirectly, such as communicating with the network device via one of the terminal device 121 to the terminal device 124 shown in the figure. This application does not limit this.
此外,终端设备之间还可以直接通信。例如可以利用D2D技术等实现终端设备之间的直接通信。例如,终端设备121与122之间、终端设备123与124之间,可以利用D2D技术直接通信。本申请对此不作限定。In addition, terminal devices can communicate directly. For example, D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices. For example, between the terminal devices 121 and 122, and between the terminal devices 123 and 124, D2D technology can be used to directly communicate. This application does not limit this.
终端设备通常可以通过物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)和物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)向网络设备发送上行信号,例如通过PUCCH传输上行控制信息(uplink control information,UCI)或通过PUSCH传输上行数据等。The terminal device can usually send uplink signals to the network device through the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) and the physical uplink share channel (PUSCH), for example, the uplink control information (UCI) is transmitted through the PUCCH. ) Or transmit uplink data through PUSCH, etc.
由于上行资源有限,为了提升信道容量,多个终端设备可以使用相同的时频资源向网络设备发送上行信号。但这可能会造成多个终端设备的上行信号的相互干扰,例如图中的终端设备121与终端设备122在相同时频资源上发送的上行信号之间的相互干扰,终端设备123与终端设备124在相同时频资源上发送的上行信号之间的相互干扰。Due to limited uplink resources, in order to increase channel capacity, multiple terminal devices can use the same time-frequency resource to send uplink signals to the network device. However, this may cause mutual interference between the uplink signals of multiple terminal devices. For example, the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 in the figure may cause mutual interference between the uplink signals sent on the same time-frequency resource. The terminal device 123 and the terminal device 124 may interfere with each other. Mutual interference between uplink signals sent on the same time-frequency resource.
假设终端设备121和终端设备122在相同的时频资源上传输,下式示出了网络设备接收到的来自终端设备121和终端设备122的信号的一例:Assuming that the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 are transmitting on the same time-frequency resource, the following formula shows an example of the signal from the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 received by the network device:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000001
其中,r表示接收信号,h 1表示第一上行信道,γ 1表示该第一上行信道的幅度,α 1表示该第一上行信道的相位;s 1表示通过第一上行信道传输的信号;h 2表示第二上行信道,γ 2表示该第二上行信道的幅度,α 2表示该第二上行信道的相位;s 2表示通过第二上行信 道传输的信号;E S表示经过调制后的星座图符号的能量;n表示噪声。 Where r represents the received signal, h 1 represents the first uplink channel, γ 1 represents the amplitude of the first uplink channel, α 1 represents the phase of the first uplink channel; s 1 represents the signal transmitted through the first uplink channel; h 2 shows a second uplink channel, γ 2 represents the second uplink channel amplitude, α 2 denotes the phase of the second upstream channels; S 2 is represented by a signal a second transmission over the uplink channel; E S represents the constellation diagram after modulated The energy of the symbol; n represents noise.
可以看到,第一上行信号与第二上行信号之间相互干扰,导致网络设备对第一上行信号的第二上行信号的接收质量不佳,从而会影响系统传输性能。It can be seen that the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal interfere with each other, resulting in poor reception quality of the second uplink signal of the first uplink signal by the network device, thereby affecting the transmission performance of the system.
例如,当网络设备对PUCCH的接收质量不佳时,网络设备对PUCCH中传输的UCI可能就无法正确译码。这可能会导致后续网络设备对下行传输的调度也产生不利影响。For example, when the receiving quality of the PUCCH by the network device is not good, the UCI transmitted in the PUCCH may not be decoded correctly by the network device. This may cause subsequent network equipment to adversely affect the scheduling of downlink transmission.
通常情况下,终端设备可以通过预编码来减小多用户之间的干扰。由于预编码操作通常需要根据预编码矩阵对各个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理,对于终端设备来说,处理的复杂度较高。Generally, terminal equipment can reduce interference among multiple users through precoding. Since the precoding operation usually needs to perform weighting processing on the signals of each transmit antenna port according to the precoding matrix, the processing complexity is relatively high for the terminal device.
有鉴于此,本申请提供一种用于传输上行数据的方法,以期降低预编码操作的复杂度。In view of this, the present application provides a method for transmitting uplink data, in order to reduce the complexity of the precoding operation.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例,在介绍本申请实施例之前,做出如下几点说明:In order to better understand the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the embodiments of the present application, the following explanations are made:
第一,在本申请中,“指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示。当描述某一指示信息用于指示A时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示A或间接指示A,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有A。First, in this application, "instructions" can include direct instructions and indirect instructions. When describing a certain indication information for indicating A, the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。The information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc. The information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of a pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in an agreement) of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and give unified instructions, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof. For the specific details of the various indication modes, reference may be made to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur. In the specific implementation process, the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method. As a result, the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering that can make the instruction to be instructed Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令和物理层信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中,无线资源控制信令例如包无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令;MAC层信令例如包括MAC控制元素(control element,CE);物理层信令例如包括下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。The information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. The configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling. Among them, radio resource control signaling, such as packet radio resource control (RRC) signaling; MAC layer signaling, for example, includes MAC control element (CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control). information, DCI).
第二,在下文示出的实施例中第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的指示信息等。Second, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different instructions.
第三,“预定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不 做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Third, "pre-defined" can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). Make a limit. Wherein, "saving" may refer to storing in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第四,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Fourth, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第五,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Fifth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c. Among them, a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
第六,在本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”等描述均指在某种客观情况下设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)在实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。Sixth, in the embodiments of this application, the descriptions of "when...", "under the condition of...", "if" and "if" all refer to equipment (such as terminal equipment or The network device will make the corresponding processing, which is not a time limit, and the device (such as a terminal device or a network device) is not required to have a judging action when it is implemented, nor does it mean that there are other restrictions.
下面将结合附图对本申请提供的方法做详细说明。The method provided in this application will be described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
应理解,下文仅为便于理解和说明,以第一终端设备、第二终端设备与网络设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例所提供的方法。其中,网络设备例如可以对应于图1所示通信系统中的网络设备111;第一终端设备和第二终端设备例如可以对应于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备121至124中,使用相同时频资源发送上行信号且存在干扰的两个终端设备,如121和终端设备122,或终端设备123和终端设备124,或终端设备121和终端设备124等,为了简洁,这里不一一列举。It should be understood that the following is only for ease of understanding and description, and the interaction between the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the network device is taken as an example to describe in detail the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. Among them, the network device may correspond to the network device 111 in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, for example; the first terminal device and the second terminal device may correspond to the terminal devices 121 to 124 in the communication system shown in FIG. Two terminal devices that transmit uplink signals at the same time and interfere with each other, such as 121 and terminal device 122, or terminal device 123 and terminal device 124, or terminal device 121 and terminal device 124, are not listed here for brevity.
此外,下文实施例虽然描述了第一终端设备、第二终端设备与网络设备之间的交互,但这不应对各步骤的执行主体构成任何限定。例如,下文实施例示出的终端设备(如第一终端设备、第二终端设备)可以替换为配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片、芯片系统或其他能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块)。下文实施例示出的网络设备也可以替换为配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片、芯片系统或其他能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块)。In addition, although the following embodiments describe the interaction between the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the network device, this should not constitute any limitation on the execution subject of each step. For example, the terminal devices (such as the first terminal device and the second terminal device) shown in the following embodiments can be replaced with components configured in the terminal device (such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs). ). The network devices shown in the following embodiments can also be replaced with components (such as circuits, chips, chip systems, or other functional modules that can call and execute programs) configured in the network device.
图2是本申请实施例提供的通信方法200的示意性流程图。如图2所示,该方法200可以包括步骤201至步骤216。下面对方法200中的各步骤做详细说明。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 200 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 201 to step 216. The steps in the method 200 are described in detail below.
在步骤201中,网络设备获取第一上行信道的相位或第一下行信道的相位。In step 201, the network device obtains the phase of the first uplink channel or the phase of the first downlink channel.
在本申请实施例中,该第一上行信道例如可以是网络设备与第一终端设备之间的上行信道。该第一下行信道例如可以是该网络设备与该第一终端设备之间的下行信道。由于第一下行信道和第一上行信道都为第一终端设备与网络设备之间的信道,二者可以通过例如频分双工(frequency division duplexing,FDD)、时分双工(time division duplexing,TDD)等通信模式来实现上、下行信号的传输。因此,可以认为该第一上行信道与第一下行信道之间是相对应的。In the embodiment of the present application, the first uplink channel may be, for example, an uplink channel between the network device and the first terminal device. The first downlink channel may be, for example, a downlink channel between the network device and the first terminal device. Since the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are both channels between the first terminal device and the network device, the two can pass through, for example, frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (time division duplexing). TDD) and other communication modes to realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals. Therefore, it can be considered that the first uplink channel corresponds to the first downlink channel.
作为示例而非限定,该第一上行信道可以是物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)或物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)。As an example and not a limitation, the first uplink channel may be a physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以通过对第一上行信道的测量确定第一上行信道的相位,如图2中的步骤201a。在另一种实现方式中,网络设备也可以从第一终端设备获取第一下行信道的相位,如图2中的201b所示。下面结合这两种不同的实现方式来做详细说明。In an implementation manner, the network device may determine the phase of the first uplink channel by measuring the first uplink channel, as shown in step 201a in FIG. 2. In another implementation manner, the network device may also obtain the phase of the first downlink channel from the first terminal device, as shown in 201b in FIG. 2. The following is a detailed description in combination with these two different implementations.
在前一种实现方式中,网络设备可以基于接收到的来自第一终端设备的上行参考信号,如SRS等,测量第一上行信道,以获得该第一上行信道的相位,如图中步骤201a所示。网络设备基于上行参考信号对第一上行信道进行测量的具体方法可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不做详述。In the former implementation manner, the network device may measure the first uplink channel based on the received uplink reference signal from the first terminal device, such as SRS, etc., to obtain the phase of the first uplink channel, as shown in step 201a Shown. The specific method for the network device to measure the first uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
该第一上行信道的相位用于确定第一预编码,该第一预编码可用于对通过第一上行信道传输的第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码。由于网络设备基于上行参考信号对第一上行信道进行信道测量,进而获取到该第一上行信道的相位,因此基于该第一上行信道的相位所确定的第一预编码是与第一上行信道相适配的。该实现方式可以适用于FDD、TDD等通信模式。The phase of the first uplink channel is used to determine the first precoding, and the first precoding may be used to precode the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal transmitted through the first uplink channel. Since the network device performs channel measurement on the first uplink channel based on the uplink reference signal, and then obtains the phase of the first uplink channel, the first precoding determined based on the phase of the first uplink channel is the same as that of the first uplink channel. Adapted. This implementation can be applied to communication modes such as FDD and TDD.
网络设备还可以基于测量粒度,对第一上行信道进行测量。该测量粒度可以是指网络设备测量第一上行信道所基于的频域粒度。作为示例而非限定,该测量粒度例如可以是子带(subband)。当然,测量粒度也可以是其他可能的频域粒度。本申请对此不作限定。The network device may also measure the first uplink channel based on the measurement granularity. The measurement granularity may refer to the frequency domain granularity on which the network device measures the first uplink channel. As an example and not a limitation, the measurement granularity may be a subband, for example. Of course, the measurement granularity can also be other possible frequency domain granularity. This application does not limit this.
在后一种实现方式中,网络设备可以通过发送下行参考信号,如CSI-RS等,来获取第一终端设备对第一下行信道的测量结果。网络设备例如可以配置不同时域行为的下行参考信号,如配置周期(periodic)、非周期(aperiodic)、半静态(semi-persistant,SP)等的下行参考信号,以获得针对不同时域行为的下行参考信号的测量结果。终端设备基于下行参考信号对第一下行信道进行测量的具体方法也可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不做详述。In the latter implementation manner, the network device may obtain the measurement result of the first downlink channel by the first terminal device by sending a downlink reference signal, such as a CSI-RS. For example, the network device can configure downlink reference signals with different time domain behaviors, such as configuring periodic (periodic), aperiodic (aperiodic), semi-persistant (semi-persistant, SP), etc., to obtain downlink reference signals for different time domain behaviors. The measurement result of the downlink reference signal. The specific method for the terminal device to measure the first downlink channel based on the downlink reference signal can also refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be described in detail here.
在某些情况下,网络设备可能在最近一段时间内都未接收到来自第一终端设备的上行参考信号,故无法获得有关该第一上行信道的最新的信道信息。此情况下,网络设备可以将来自第一终端设备的第一下行信道的测量结果,确定第一下行信道的相位。In some cases, the network device may not receive the uplink reference signal from the first terminal device in a recent period of time, and therefore cannot obtain the latest channel information about the first uplink channel. In this case, the network device may determine the phase of the first downlink channel based on the measurement result of the first downlink channel from the first terminal device.
由于第一下行信道与第一上行信道之间可能通过FDD或TDD等通信模式来实现上、下行信号的传输,故第一下行信道与第一上行信道之间可能具有一定的互易性。例如,在TDD通信模式下,第一下行信道与第一上行信道之间是可以完全互易的;在FDD通信模式下,第一下行信道与第一上行信道之间也具有部分互易性。故,该第一下行信道的相位可以被近似地当成第一上行信道的相位,可用于确定第一预编码。因此,网络设备也可以基于第一下行信道的相位确定的第一预编码。由此而确定的第一预编码在一定程度上也能够与第一上行信道相适配。Since the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel may realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals through communication modes such as FDD or TDD, there may be a certain reciprocity between the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel . For example, in the TDD communication mode, the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are completely reciprocal; in the FDD communication mode, the first downlink channel and the first uplink channel are also partially reciprocal. sex. Therefore, the phase of the first downlink channel can be approximated as the phase of the first uplink channel, which can be used to determine the first precoding. Therefore, the network device may also determine the first precoding based on the phase of the first downlink channel. The first precoding thus determined can also be adapted to the first uplink channel to a certain extent.
在这种实现方式中,网络设备可以在步骤201b中接收第一信道信息,该第一信道信息可用于指示第一下行信道的相位。相应地,在步骤201b中,第一终端设备发送第一信道信息。In this implementation manner, the network device may receive the first channel information in step 201b, and the first channel information may be used to indicate the phase of the first downlink channel. Correspondingly, in step 201b, the first terminal device sends the first channel information.
可选地,该第一上行信道的频域资源与第一终端设备测量所基于第一下行信道的频域资源有重叠。例如,该第一上行信道的频域资源为第一下行信道的频域资源的一部分。或 者,第一下行信道的频域资源为第一上行信道的频域资源的一部分。或者,第一下行信道的频域资源与第一上行信道的频域资源相同。这是因为第一终端设备对第一下行信道的测量结果更加适用于在测量的频域资源范围内确定第一预编码,由此而确定的第一预编码也能够与第一上行信道更加适配。Optionally, the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel overlaps with the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel based on the measurement of the first terminal device. For example, the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel. Or, the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel. Or, the frequency domain resource of the first downlink channel is the same as the frequency domain resource of the first uplink channel. This is because the measurement result of the first downlink channel by the first terminal device is more suitable for determining the first precoding within the range of the measured frequency domain resources, and the determined first precoding can also be more compatible with the first uplink channel. adaptation.
可选地,该第一终端设备还可以基于上报粒度,发送该第一信道信息。Optionally, the first terminal device may also send the first channel information based on the reporting granularity.
这里,上报粒度可以是指该第一终端设备上报该第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。该第一终端设备基于上报粒度所发送的第一信道信息可用于指示与上报粒度对应的信道的相位。Here, the reporting granularity may refer to the frequency domain granularity on which the first terminal device reports the first channel information. The first channel information sent by the first terminal device based on the reporting granularity may be used to indicate the phase of the channel corresponding to the reporting granularity.
由于第一终端设备所发送的第一信道信息用于指示上报粒度对应的信道的相位,故该第一终端设备可以基于该上报粒度对第一下行信道进行测量,以获得与上报粒度对应的信道的相位。因此从另一个角度来说,该上报粒度也可以称为测量粒度。作为示例而非限定,上报粒度例如可以是子带(subband)。当然,上报粒度也可以是其他可能的频域粒度。本申请对此不作限定。Since the first channel information sent by the first terminal device is used to indicate the phase of the channel corresponding to the reporting granularity, the first terminal device may measure the first downlink channel based on the reporting granularity to obtain the corresponding report granularity. The phase of the channel. Therefore, from another perspective, the reporting granularity can also be referred to as the measurement granularity. As an example and not a limitation, the reporting granularity may be a subband, for example. Of course, the reporting granularity can also be other possible frequency domain granularity. This application does not limit this.
该上报粒度可以是预定义的,如协议预先定义;也可以是网络设备预先通过信令指示的。本申请对此不作限定。The reporting granularity may be pre-defined, such as a protocol; it may also be indicated by the network device through signaling in advance. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该方法还包括:网络设备发送上报粒度的指示信息。相应地,第一终端设备接收上报粒度的指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sending indication information of the reporting granularity. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the indication information of the reporting granularity.
一种可能的情况是,网络设备可以复用已有信令中对信道测量配置的上报粒度,或者说,本申请实施例中所提及的上报粒度可以沿用已有的信道测量的上报粒度。作为示例而非限定,该已有信令可以是信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)上报(CSI reporting)配置。A possible situation is that the network device can reuse the reporting granularity of the channel measurement configuration in the existing signaling, or in other words, the reporting granularity mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can use the existing channel measurement reporting granularity. As an example and not a limitation, the existing signaling may be a channel state information (channel state information, CSI) reporting (CSI reporting) configuration.
在步骤201b中,第一终端设备对第一下行信道的相位的指示可以有很多种。在一种实现方式中,协议可以预先定义一码本,该码本中可以包括M 1(M 1>1,且为整数)个码字,该M 1个码字的相位可以在0至2π范围内均分。 In step 201b, the first terminal device may indicate the phase of the first downlink channel in many ways. In an implementation manner, the protocol may predefine a codebook, the codebook may include M 1 (M 1 > 1, and is an integer) codewords, and the phase of the M 1 codewords may be between 0 and 2π Divide equally within the range.
作为一示例,该码本可以包括如下M 1个码字: As an example, the codebook may include the following M 1 codewords:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000002
该M 1个码字的相位分别为0,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000003
可以看到,该M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内被均分为M 1份。每个码字可对应一个相位。
The phases of the M 1 codewords are 0 respectively,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000003
It can be seen that the phase of the M 1 codewords is equally divided into M 1 parts in the range of 0 to 2π. Each codeword can correspond to a phase.
假设该第一下行信道的相位记为σ 1。该第一终端设备在通过第一信道信息指示该第一下行信道的相位σ 1时,例如可以通过该M 1个码字中相位与σ 1相同或最接近的一个码字来指示。该M 1个码字中相位与σ 1相同或最接近的码字可以称为与该第一下行信道的相位σ 1对应的码字。该第一终端设备从码本中确定与相位σ 1对应的码字的过程,也即确定该相位σ 1的量化值的过程。该第一终端设备可以通过该第一信道信息来指示该相位σ 1的量化值。 Assume that the phase of the first downlink channel is denoted as σ 1 . When the first terminal device indicates the phase σ 1 of the first downlink channel through the first channel information, for example, it may indicate the phase σ 1 of the M 1 code words with the same or the closest phase to σ 1. Among the M 1 codewords, the codeword whose phase is the same as or closest to σ 1 may be referred to as the codeword corresponding to the phase σ 1 of the first downlink channel. The first terminal device is determined from a codebook σ phase during a corresponding codeword, i.e. the process of determining the phase quantized value of 1 σ. The first terminal device may indicate the quantized value of the phase σ 1 through the first channel information.
在一种实现方式中,该第一终端设备可以从该M 1个码字中确定出与该第一下行信道的相位σ 1的夹角最小的码字,将该码字作为该第一信道信息的相位σ 1的量化值来指示。 In one implementation, the first terminal device may be determined from the M 1 codewords out of phase with the first downlink channel angle σ 1 is the smallest code word, the code word as the first The quantized value of the phase σ 1 of the channel information is indicated.
第一终端设备对该相位σ 1的量化值的指示方有很多种。例如,协议可以预定义上述M 1个码字可以与M 1个索引的一一对应关系。该M 1个索引例如可以是上述M 1个码字中 的m 1。该第一终端设备可以在第一信道信息中携带该相位σ 1的量化值的索引m 1,以指示该相位σ 1的量化值。 The first terminal device can indicate the quantized value of the phase σ 1 in many ways. For example, the protocol may predefine a one-to-one correspondence between the M 1 codewords and M 1 indexes. The M 1 indexes may be m 1 in the aforementioned M 1 codewords, for example. The first terminal device may carry the index m 1 of the quantized value of the phase σ 1 in the first channel information to indicate the quantized value of the phase σ 1.
本申请对于码本中码字的个数M 1的值的具体取值不作限定。可以理解,M 1的值越大,对角度划分的粒度越细,对相位σ 1的指示也就越精确。 This application does not limit the specific value of the number of codewords M 1 in the codebook. It can be understood that the larger the value of M 1 , the finer the granularity of the angle division, and the more accurate the indication of the phase σ 1 will be.
应理解,上文所示例的第一终端设备对第一下行信道的相位的具体指示方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位的具体方式不作限定。It should be understood that the specific indication manner of the phase of the first downlink channel by the first terminal device exemplified above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of the first downlink channel.
在步骤202中,网络设备确定第一预编码。In step 202, the network device determines the first precoding.
在本申请实施例中,第一预编码为标量,因此可以称为标量预编码。第一预编码可用于对经过BPSK之后的第一上行信号进行预编码,该第一上行信号可通过第一上行信道传输。具体来说,该第一预编码在用于对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码的过程中,可以对第一上行信道的相位进行旋转。由于该预编码操作是对经BPSK之后的调制符号进行预编码,也即对经BPSK得到的星座图进行预编码,故该预编码操作可以称为星座预编码(constellation precoding,CP)。In the embodiment of the present application, the first precoding is a scalar, and therefore may be referred to as scalar precoding. The first precoding can be used to precode the first uplink signal after BPSK, and the first uplink signal can be transmitted through the first uplink channel. Specifically, the first precoding may rotate the phase of the first uplink channel in a process of precoding the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal. Since the precoding operation is to precode the modulation symbols after BPSK, that is, to precode the constellation obtained by BPSK, the precoding operation can be called constellation precoding (CP).
在仅存在第一终端设备向网络设备发送第一上行信号的情况下,网络设备对该预编码后的第一上行信号的接收信号r可以表示为:In the case where only the first terminal device sends the first uplink signal to the network device, the received signal r of the precoded first uplink signal by the network device can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000004
其中,h 1、γ 1、α 1、s 2所表示的含义可参见前文。x 1表示第一预编码,β 1表示第一预编码的相位。可以看到,网络设备对第一上行信号的接收信号中,相位由α 1变成了α 11Among them, the meanings represented by h 1 , γ 1 , α 1 , and s 2 can be referred to the foregoing. x 1 represents the first precoding, and β 1 represents the phase of the first precoding. It can be seen that in the received signal of the first uplink signal by the network device, the phase changes from α 1 to α 11 .
网络设备可以基于第一上行信道的相位确定第一预编码的相位,进而确定第一预编码。由此而确定的第一预编码是标量预编码,通过对信道的相位进行旋转来实现预编码。相比于现有技术中对各发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理的预编码操作而言,本申请中提出的星座预编码复杂度更低,操作也更简单。The network device may determine the phase of the first precoding based on the phase of the first uplink channel, and then determine the first precoding. The first precoding thus determined is scalar precoding, and precoding is achieved by rotating the phase of the channel. Compared with the precoding operation of performing weighting processing on the signal of each transmit antenna port in the prior art, the constellation precoding proposed in this application has lower complexity and simpler operation.
如前所述,在MU-MIMO中,多个终端设备可能会采用相同的时频资源与同一网络设备通信。上述第一上行信道所对应的时频资源上还可能传输有其他的上行信道,如第二上行信道。该第二上行信道上可能传输有其他终端设备的上行信号,如来自第二终端设备的第二上行信号。网络设备所获取到的接收信号可以表示为:As mentioned earlier, in MU-MIMO, multiple terminal devices may use the same time-frequency resources to communicate with the same network device. The time-frequency resource corresponding to the first uplink channel may also be transmitted with other uplink channels, such as the second uplink channel. The second uplink channel may transmit uplink signals of other terminal equipment, such as the second uplink signal from the second terminal equipment. The received signal obtained by the network device can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000005
其中,h 2表示第二上行信道,γ 2表示第二上行信道的幅度,α 2表示第二上行信道的相位;x 2表示第二预编码,s 2表示第二上行信号。 Among them, h 2 represents the second uplink channel, γ 2 represents the amplitude of the second uplink channel, and α 2 represents the phase of the second uplink channel; x 2 represents the second precoding, and s 2 represents the second uplink signal.
要提高第一上行信号的接收质量,可以通过对第一预编码的设计,来消除第二上行信号所带来的干扰。To improve the reception quality of the first uplink signal, the interference caused by the second uplink signal can be eliminated through the design of the first precoding.
在BPSK调制中,网络设备只需要检测原始的调制符号的实部,这样在使用匹配滤波器(match filter,MF)检测时,可以发现MF检测的信号实部y可以表示为:In BPSK modulation, the network device only needs to detect the real part of the original modulation symbol. In this way, when using matched filter (MF) detection, it can be found that the real part y of the signal detected by MF can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000006
其中,Re()表示取实部。
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000007
表示由于第二上行信号的传输造成的 干扰。因此,只要使得将该干扰减小,便可以提高该第一上行信号的接收质量。
Among them, Re() represents the real part.
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000007
Indicates the interference caused by the transmission of the second uplink signal. Therefore, as long as the interference is reduced, the reception quality of the first uplink signal can be improved.
进一步观察可以发现,只要满足cos(α 211)=0,第二上行信号的传输对第一上行信号的接收便不会造成干扰。也即,当β 1=α 21±π/2,第二上行信号的传输对第一上行信号的接收便不会造成干扰。因此,当第一预编码的相位的取值能够无限趋近于α 21±π/2,该第二上行信道的传输对第一上行信号的接收所造成的干扰可以无限小。 From further observation, it can be found that as long as cos(α 211 )=0 is satisfied, the transmission of the second uplink signal will not cause interference to the reception of the first uplink signal. That is, when β 121 ±π/2, the transmission of the second uplink signal will not cause interference to the reception of the first uplink signal. Therefore, when the value of the phase of the first precoding can be infinitely close to α 21 ±π/2, the interference caused by the transmission of the second uplink channel to the reception of the first uplink signal can be infinitely small.
在一种可能的设计中,可以将第一预编码的相位β 1设计为在α 21±π/2的范围内。 In a possible design, the phase β 1 of the first precoding may be designed to be in the range of α 21 ±π/2.
由此可以看到,网络设备可以基于第一上行信道的相位和第二上行信道的相位来确定第一预编码。如前所述,在某些情况下,第一上行信道的相位可以基于上下行信道的互易性,由第一下行信道的相位来替代。与之相似,第二上行信道的相位也可以由第二下行信道的相位来替代。若将第二下行信道的相位记为σ 2。则上式可以进一步扩展为: It can be seen from this that the network device can determine the first precoding based on the phase of the first uplink channel and the phase of the second uplink channel. As mentioned above, in some cases, the phase of the first uplink channel may be replaced by the phase of the first downlink channel based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. Similarly, the phase of the second uplink channel can also be replaced by the phase of the second downlink channel. If the phase of the second downlink channel is denoted as σ 2 . Then the above formula can be further extended to:
σ 21±π/2,或σ 21±π/2,或α 21±π/2。 σ 21 ±π/2, or σ 21 ±π/2, or α 21 ±π/2.
此外,由于余弦函数在0到2π范围内循环的周期函数,故上文中的±π/2可以理解为是π/2的奇数倍,或者,上文公式中的左侧或右侧均可以在±2π的整数倍的范围内扩展。In addition, since the cosine function is a periodic function that circulates in the range of 0 to 2π, the above ±π/2 can be understood as an odd multiple of π/2, or the left or right side of the above formula can be either Extend within the range of integer multiples of ±2π.
可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤203,网络设备获取第二上行信道的相位或第二下行信道的相位。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 203: the network device obtains the phase of the second uplink channel or the phase of the second downlink channel.
与步骤201中所述相似,该第二上行信道例如可以是网络设备与第二终端设备之间的上行信道。该第二下行信道例如可以是该网络设备与该第二终端设备之间的下行信道。由于第二下行信道和第二上行信道都为第二终端设备与网络设备之间的信道,二者可以通过例如频分双工(frequency division duplexing,FDD)、时分双工(time division duplexing,TDD)等通信模式来实现上、下行信号的传输。因此,可以认为该第二上行信道与第二下行信道之间是相对应的。Similar to that described in step 201, the second uplink channel may be, for example, an uplink channel between the network device and the second terminal device. The second downlink channel may be, for example, a downlink channel between the network device and the second terminal device. Since both the second downlink channel and the second uplink channel are the channels between the second terminal device and the network device, they can be implemented through, for example, frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD). ) And other communication modes to realize the transmission of uplink and downlink signals. Therefore, it can be considered that the second uplink channel corresponds to the second downlink channel.
若网络设备通过从第二终端设备接收第二信道信息来获取第二下行信道的相位,可选地,第二上行信道的频域资源与第二终端设备测量所基于的第二下行信道的频域资源有重叠。例如,该第二上行信道的频域资源为第二下行信道的频域资源的一部分。或者,第二下行信道的频域资源为第二上行信道的频域资源的一部分。或者,第二下行信道的频域资源与第二上行信道的频域资源相同。这是因为第二终端设备对第二下行信道的测量结果更加适用于在测量的频域资源范围内确定第二预编码,由此而确定的第二预编码也能够与第二上行信道更加适配。If the network device obtains the phase of the second downlink channel by receiving the second channel information from the second terminal device, optionally, the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel is the same as the frequency of the second downlink channel on which the second terminal device measures. There is overlap in domain resources. For example, the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel. Or, the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel is a part of the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel. Or, the frequency domain resource of the second downlink channel is the same as the frequency domain resource of the second uplink channel. This is because the measurement result of the second downlink channel by the second terminal device is more suitable for determining the second precoding within the range of the measured frequency domain resources, and the determined second precoding can also be more suitable for the second uplink channel. match.
网络设备执行步骤203的具体实现方式可以与网络设备执行步骤201的具体实现方式相似,例如网络设备可以基于上行信道的测量获取第二上行信道的相位,或者,从第二终端设备接收第二信道信息,以获取下行信道的相位。由于上文步骤201中已经对这两种实现方式做了详细说明,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。The specific implementation manner of the network device performing step 203 may be similar to the specific implementation manner of the network device performing step 201. For example, the network device may obtain the phase of the second uplink channel based on the measurement of the uplink channel, or receive the second channel from the second terminal device. Information to obtain the phase of the downlink channel. Since these two implementations have been described in detail in step 201 above, for the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
下文中为方便理解和说明,假设网络设备在步骤201中获取到了第一下行信道的相位为σ 1,在步骤203中获取到了第二下行信道的相位为σ 2。网络设备可以基于获取到的相位σ 1和σ 2确定第一预编码的相位,进而确定第一预编码。 Hereinafter, for ease of understanding and explanation, it is assumed that the network device obtains the phase of the first downlink channel as σ 1 in step 201 and obtains the phase of the second downlink channel as σ 2 in step 203. The network device may determine the phase of the first precoding based on the acquired phases σ 1 and σ 2 , and then determine the first precoding.
可以理解,下文示出的多个可能的情况下,第一下行信道的相位σ 1可以替换为第一上行信道的相位α 1,第二下行信道的相位σ 2可以替换为第二上行信道的相位α 2。为了简洁,下文不再对每种情况一一扩展说明。 It can be understood that in the multiple possible situations shown below, the phase σ 1 of the first downlink channel can be replaced with the phase α 1 of the first uplink channel, and the phase σ 2 of the second downlink channel can be replaced with the second uplink channel. The phase α 2 . For the sake of brevity, the following will not expand on each case one by one.
一种可能的情况是,网络设备确定第二上行信道的相位σ 2为0,则上式可以进一步变 形为β 1=±π/2-σ 1。此情况下,网络设备可以直接基于第一上行信道的相位σ 1来确定第一预编码的相位β 1A possible situation is that the network device determines that the phase σ 2 of the second uplink channel is 0, and the above formula can be further transformed into β 1 =±π/2-σ 1 . In this case, the network device may directly determine the phase β 1 of the first precoding based on the phase σ 1 of the first uplink channel.
另一种可能的情况是,网络设备可能在最近一段时间内未能获得第二上行信道的相位和第二下行信道的相位。此情况下,可以根据此前一次或多次对第二上行信道的测量,或此前一次或多次对第二下行信道的测量来估计α 2或σ 2的值,进而由α 21±π/2或σ 21±π/2或σ 21±π/2或α 21±π/2来确定第一预编码的相位β 1Another possible situation is that the network device may have failed to obtain the phase of the second uplink channel and the phase of the second downlink channel in a recent period of time. In this case, the value of α 2 or σ 2 can be estimated based on one or more previous measurements on the second uplink channel, or one or more previous measurements on the second downlink channel, and then the value of α 2 or σ 2 can be determined from α 21 ± π/2 or σ 21 ±π/2 or σ 21 ±π/2 or α 21 ±π/2 to determine the phase β 1 of the first precoding.
作为一个实施例,网络设备可以进一步确定第二预编码,该第二预编码可用于对上述第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码。如前所述,该第二上行信号和第一上行信号可以通过相同的时频资源传输,即,用于传输第一上行信号的第一上行信道与用于传输第二上行信号的第二上行信道重叠,该第二预编码的相位例如记为β 2,则网络设备所获取的接收信号r'可以表示为: As an embodiment, the network device may further determine a second precoding, and the second precoding may be used to precode the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal. As mentioned above, the second uplink signal and the first uplink signal can be transmitted through the same time-frequency resource, that is, the first uplink channel used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink channel used to transmit the second uplink signal. The channel overlaps, and the phase of the second precoding is denoted as β 2 , for example, and the received signal r'obtained by the network device can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000008
其中,h 2表示第二上行信道,γ 2表示第二上行信道的幅度,σ 2表示第二上行信道的相位;x 2表示第二上行信号;s 2表示第二上行信号;β 2表示第二预编码的相位。如前所述,式中的σ 1可以替换为α 1,σ 2可以替换为α 2Among them, h 2 represents the second uplink channel, γ 2 represents the amplitude of the second uplink channel, σ 2 represents the phase of the second uplink channel; x 2 represents the second uplink signal; s 2 represents the second uplink signal; β 2 represents the first uplink signal. Two precoding phase. As mentioned earlier, σ 1 in the formula can be replaced by α 1 , and σ 2 can be replaced by α 2 .
网络设备可以通过对第一预编码和第二预编码的设计,消除第一上行信号和第二上行信号之间的相互干扰,以达到提高接收质量的效果。可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤204,网络设备确定第二预编码。The network device can eliminate the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal by designing the first precoding and the second precoding, so as to achieve the effect of improving the reception quality. Optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 204, the network device determines the second precoding.
在BPSK调制中,网络设备只需要检测原始的调制符号的实部,这样在使用匹配滤波器(match filter,MF)检测时,若以第一上行信号为例,MF检测的信号实部y可以表示为:In BPSK modulation, the network equipment only needs to detect the real part of the original modulation symbol, so when using matched filter (match filter, MF) detection, if the first uplink signal is taken as an example, the real part y of the signal detected by MF can be Expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000009
其中,Re()表示取实部。
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000010
表示由于第二上行信号的传输造成的干扰。因此,只要使得将该干扰减小,便可以提高该第一上行信号的接收质量。
Among them, Re() represents the real part.
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000010
Indicates the interference caused by the transmission of the second uplink signal. Therefore, as long as the interference is reduced, the reception quality of the first uplink signal can be improved.
进一步观察可以发现,只要满足cos(β 2211)=0,第二上行信号的传输对第一上行信号的接收便不会造成干扰。也即,β 21=σ 21±π/2。第二上行信号的传输对第一上行信号的接收便不会造成干扰。因此,当第一预编码的相位β 1与第二预编码的相位β 2的差值β 21能够无限趋近于σ 21±π/2,第一上行信号和第二上行信号之间的相互干扰便可以趋于零。 From further observation, it can be found that as long as cos(β 2211 )=0 is satisfied, the transmission of the second uplink signal will not cause interference to the reception of the first uplink signal. That is, β 2121 ±π/2. The transmission of the second uplink signal will not cause interference to the reception of the first uplink signal. Thus, when the phase of a first pre-encoding beta] phase beta] 1 and the second pre-encoding the difference value β 2 2 -β 1 can be infinitely approaching σ 2 -σ 1 ± π / 2 , the first and second uplink signal The mutual interference between the uplink signals can then tend to zero.
在一种可能的设计中,网络设备可以通过对第一预编码的相位β 1和第二预编码的相位β 2的设计,将二者的差值β 21控制在σ 21±π/2的范围内。 In a possible design, the network device can control the difference β 2- β 1 between the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 to σ 2 -σ by designing the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2. Within the range of 1 ±π/2.
在上述第一预编码的相位β 1确定的情况下,即,步骤202已经执行了的情况下,网络设备可以根据β 1的值确定β 2In the case where the phase of the first pre-encoding β 1 is determined, i.e., the step 202 has been performed, the network device may be determined according to the value of β 1 β 2 of.
在一种实现方式中,网络设备可以基于第一上行信道的相位α 1和第二上行信道的相位α 2,确定第一预编码的相位β 1和第二预编码的相位β 2。即,上述步骤204与步骤202可以合为一个步骤来执行,网络设备可以同时确定第一预编码和第二预编码。 In an implementation manner, the network device may determine the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 based on the phase α 1 of the first uplink channel and the phase α 2 of the second uplink channel. That is, the above step 204 and step 202 can be combined into one step to be executed, and the network device can determine the first precoding and the second precoding at the same time.
一示例,第一预编码的相位β 1为0,第二预编码的相位β 2为σ 21±π/2。 In an example, the phase β 1 of the first precoding is 0, and the phase β 2 of the second precoding is σ 21 ±π/2.
另一示例,第一预编码的相位β 1为±π/2,第二预编码的相位β 2为σ 21In another example, the phase β 1 of the first precoding is ±π/2, and the phase β 2 of the second precoding is σ 21 .
又一示例,第二预编码的相位β 2为0,第一预编码的相位β 1为σ 21±π/2。 In another example, the phase β 2 of the second precoding is 0, and the phase β 1 of the first precoding is σ 21 ±π/2.
再一示例,第二预编码的相位β 2为±π/2,第一预编码的相位β 1为σ 21In another example, the phase β 2 of the second precoding is ±π/2, and the phase β 1 of the first precoding is σ 21 .
可以理解,当将第一预编码和第二预编码中的一个的相位设计为0时,也就相当于对第一上行信号和第二上行信号中的一个不执行预编码操作,从而在两个终端设备中,其中的一个不执行预编码操作,例如第二预编码的相位为0,则第二终端设备可以对第二上行信号不执行预编码操作,而只需第一终端设备对第一上行信号进行预编码操作,即可将第一上行信号与第二上行信号之间的相互干扰都消除。It can be understood that when the phase of one of the first precoding and the second precoding is designed to be 0, it is equivalent to not performing the precoding operation on one of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal. One of the terminal devices does not perform the precoding operation, for example, the phase of the second precoding is 0, then the second terminal device may not perform the precoding operation on the second uplink signal, but only the first terminal device needs to perform the precoding operation on the second uplink signal. The precoding operation of an uplink signal can eliminate the mutual interference between the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal.
当然,网络设备也可以将第一预编码的相位β 1和第二预编码相位β 2设计为非零值,本申请对此不作限定。只要第一预编码的相位β 1和第二预编码的相位β 2满足β 21=σ 21±π/2的范围内,均应落入本申请的保护范围内。 Of course, the network device may also design the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 to be non-zero values, which is not limited in this application. As long as the phase β 1 of the first precoding and the phase β 2 of the second precoding satisfy the range of β 2- β 121 ±π/2, they should fall within the protection scope of this application.
在步骤205中,网络设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一预编码。相应地,在步骤205中,第一终端设备接收该第一指示信息。In step 205, the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding. Correspondingly, in step 205, the first terminal device receives the first indication information.
在一种实现方式中,协议可以预先定义一码本,该码本中可以包括M 2(M 2>1,且为整数)个码字,该M 2个码字的相位可以在0至2π范围内均分。 In an implementation manner, the protocol may predefine a codebook, which may include M 2 (M 2 >1, and is an integer) codewords, and the phase of the M 2 codewords may be between 0 and 2π Divide equally within the range.
作为一示例,该码本可以包括如下M 2个码字: As an example, the codebook may include the following M 2 codewords:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000011
该M 2个码字的相位分别为0,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000012
可以看到,该M 2个码字的相位在0至2π范围内被均分为M 2份。每个码字可对应一个相位。
The phases of the M 2 codewords are 0 respectively,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000012
It can be seen that the phases of the M 2 codewords are equally divided into M 2 parts in the range of 0 to 2π. Each codeword can correspond to a phase.
网络设备可以从该码本的M 2个码字中确定出与该第一预编码的相位β 1相同或最接近的码字,并将该码字确定为与第一预编码的相位β 1对应的码字。该网络设备从码本中确定出与相位β 1对应的码字的过程,也即确定该相位β 1的量化值的过程。网络设备可以通过第一指示信息来指示该相位β 1的量化值。 The network device may determine the codeword that is the same as or closest to the phase β 1 of the first precoding from the M 2 codewords of the codebook, and determine the codeword as the phase β 1 of the first precoding. Corresponding code word. The network device determines from the codebook beta] phase with a procedure corresponding codeword, i.e. the process of determining the quantized value of the phase β 1. Indicate that the network device may be quantized values of the phase β 1 is the first indication information.
网络设备对相位β 1的量化值的指示方式有很多种。例如,协议可以预定义上述M 2个码字可以与M 2个索引的一一对应关系。该M 2个索引例如可以是上述M 2个码字中的m 2。网络设备可以在第一指示信息中携带该相位β 1的量化值的索引,以指示该相位β 1的量化值。 There are many network devices for the quantized values indicates how the phase β 1. For example, the protocol may predefine the one-to-one correspondence between the M 2 codewords and the M 2 indexes. The M 2 indexes may be, for example, m 2 in the above M 2 codewords. The network device may carry the index of the quantized phase values β 1 in the first indication information to indicate a quantized value of the phase β 1.
网络设备也可以通过长度为M 2的位图来指示该相位β 1的量化值。该位图中的M 2个比特为与M 2个码字一一对应。通过位图来指示被该相位β 1的量化值时,例如可以在被选择的码字所对应的比特位置“1”,而其他比特位置“0”。 The network device can also indicate the quantized value of the phase β 1 through a bitmap with a length of M 2. The M 2 bits in the bitmap correspond to M 2 codewords one-to-one. When the quantized values to indicate the phase is beta] 1 by the bit map, for example, in the bit position of the selected code word corresponding to "1", while the other bit positions "0."
本申请对于码本中码字的个数M 2的值的具体取值不作限定。可以理解,M 2的值越大,对角度划分的粒度越细,对相位β 1的指示也就越精确。 This application does not limit the specific value of the value M 2 of the number of codewords in the codebook. It can be understood that the larger the value of M 2 , the finer the granularity of the angle division, and the more accurate the indication of the phase β 1 will be.
可选地,M 2与M 1相同。终端设备指示下行信道的相位所使用的码本与网络设备指示预编码的相位所使用的码本可以是相同精度的码本。一种可能的情况是,终端设备指示下行信道的相位所使用的码本与网络设备指示预编码的相位所使用的码本为同一码本。此情况下,网络设备和终端设备可以通过同一码本完成信道相位和预编码相位的指示,可以节省存储空间。 Optionally, M 2 is the same as M 1. The codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding may be codebooks with the same accuracy. A possible situation is that the codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding are the same codebook. In this case, the network equipment and the terminal equipment can complete the channel phase and precoding phase indications through the same codebook, which can save storage space.
可选地,M 2与M 1不同。终端设备指示下行信道的相位所使用的码本与网络设备指示预编码的相位所使用的码本可以是不同精度的码本。此情况下,各码本可以基于对精度的不同要求而分别设计。 Optionally, M 2 is different from M 1. The codebook used by the terminal device to indicate the phase of the downlink channel and the codebook used by the network device to indicate the phase of precoding may be codebooks with different precisions. In this case, each codebook can be designed separately based on different requirements for accuracy.
网络设备可以进一步基于预编码粒度,向第一终端设备指示第一预编码。The network device may further indicate the first precoding to the first terminal device based on the precoding granularity.
这里,预编码粒度可以是指对上行信号进行预编码所基于的粒度。例如可以是本实施例中第一终端设备对第一上行信号进行预编码所基于的粒度。Here, the precoding granularity may refer to the granularity based on precoding the uplink signal. For example, it may be the granularity on which the first terminal device precodes the first uplink signal in this embodiment.
作为示例而非限定,该预编码粒度例如可以是预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group),也可以是子带,等。预编码粒度也可以是其他可能的频域粒度,本申请对此不作限定。As an example and not a limitation, the precoding granularity may be, for example, a precoding resource block group (precoding resource block group), or a subband, and so on. The precoding granularity may also be other possible frequency domain granularity, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤206,网络设备发送预编码粒度的指示信息。相应地,在步骤206中,第一终端设备接收该预编码粒度的指示信息。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 206, the network device sends indication information of precoding granularity. Correspondingly, in step 206, the first terminal device receives the indication information of the precoding granularity.
可选地,预编码粒度是预定义的。比如,协议可以预定义预编码粒度。Optionally, the precoding granularity is predefined. For example, the protocol may predefine the precoding granularity.
网络设备可以在指示第一预编码时,针对一个预编码粒度大小的一块资源指示一个预编码。假设网络设备调度的资源基于预编码粒度可以被划分为多块资源,网络设备可以指示与该多块资源对应的预编码。换言之,网络设备在通过第一指示信息指示第一预编码时,可以指示与预编码粒度对应的多个预编码。When instructing the first precoding, the network device may indicate one precoding for a block of resources with a precoding granularity. Assuming that the resources scheduled by the network device can be divided into multiple blocks of resources based on the precoding granularity, the network device can indicate the precoding corresponding to the multiple blocks of resources. In other words, when the network device indicates the first precoding through the first indication information, it may indicate multiple precodings corresponding to the precoding granularity.
网络设备对多个预编码的指示例如可以参考上文所述的方法,对每个预编码依次指示所对应的码字。比如使用量化值的索引来指示,或通过位图来指示等。为了简洁,这里不做赘述。The network device's indication of multiple precodings may refer to the method described above, for example, to indicate the corresponding codeword for each precoding in turn. For example, the index of the quantization value is used to indicate, or the bitmap is used to indicate. For the sake of brevity, I won't repeat them here.
网络设备也可以通过差分方式来指示与该多块资源对应的多个预编码。例如,对多块资源中的一块资源所对应的预编码通过上述方式来指示,对其他预编码通过差分量来指示。例如,将多块资源记为资源1至资源N,网络设备将资源1对应的预编码1通过量化值的索引或位图来指示,而对剩下的资源2至资源N对应的预编码,分别指示各预编码的相位与预编码1的相位的差值。从而可以达到减少反馈开销的效果。The network device may also indicate multiple precodings corresponding to the multiple blocks of resources in a differential manner. For example, the precoding corresponding to one of the multiple resources is indicated by the above-mentioned method, and the other precoding is indicated by the difference component. For example, if multiple resources are recorded as resource 1 to resource N, the network device indicates the precoding 1 corresponding to resource 1 through the index or bitmap of the quantization value, and precoding corresponding to the remaining resources 2 to resource N, Indicate the difference between the phase of each precoding and the phase of precoding 1 respectively. Thereby, the effect of reducing feedback overhead can be achieved.
此外,预编码粒度与上报粒度(或测量粒度)可能相同,也可能不同。本申请对此不作限定。In addition, the precoding granularity and the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity) may be the same or different. This application does not limit this.
若预编码粒度与上报粒度(或测量粒度)相同,网络设备可以根据获取到的与上报粒度对应的第一上行信道或第一下行信道的相位,确定与预编码粒度对应的第一预编码。If the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity), the network device can determine the first precoding corresponding to the precoding granularity according to the acquired phase of the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to the reporting granularity .
若预编码粒度与上报粒度(或测量粒度)不同,则可能存在以下两种情况:一、预编码粒度大于上报粒度(或测量粒度);二、预编码粒度小于上报粒度(或测量粒度)。If the precoding granularity is different from the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity), there may be two situations: first, the precoding granularity is greater than the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity); second, the precoding granularity is smaller than the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity).
在情况一中,一个预编码粒度可以是一个上报粒度的整数倍或非整数倍。网络设备可以根据获取到的多个与上报粒度(或测量粒度)对应的第一上行信道或第一下行信道的相位,来确定第一预编码。In case 1, a precoding granularity may be an integer multiple or a non-integer multiple of a reporting granularity. The network device may determine the first precoding according to the acquired multiple phases of the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity).
举例来说,一个预编码粒度为s 1,比如包括s 1个RB;一个上报粒度(或测量粒度)为s 2,比如包括s 2个RB,s 1>s 2。例如,针对一个预编码粒度大小的一块资源,网络设备可以计算与这块资源对应的
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000013
个相位,确定第一预编码。其中,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000014
表示向上取整。该
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000015
个相位可以是第一上行信道的相位或第一下行信道的相位。示例性地,网络设备可以计算该
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000016
个相位的平均值,进而根据平均值确定第一预编码的相位,或者,网络设备可以根据
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000017
个相位中的每个相位确定一个预编码的相位,进而确定
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000018
个预 编码的相位的平均值,作为第一预编码的相位。
For example, a precoding granularity is s 1 , such as including s 1 RB; a reporting granularity (or measurement granularity) is s 2 , such as including s 2 RBs, s 1 >s 2 . For example, for a piece of resource with a precoding granularity, the network device can calculate the corresponding piece of resource
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000013
Phase, determine the first precoding. in,
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000014
Indicates rounding up. Should
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000015
The first phase may be the phase of the first uplink channel or the phase of the first downlink channel. Exemplarily, the network device can calculate the
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000016
The average value of the two phases, and then determine the first precoding phase based on the average value, or the network device can be based on
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000017
Each of the two phases determines a pre-encoded phase, which in turn determines
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000018
The average value of the pre-encoded phases is used as the first pre-encoded phase.
当然,网络设备也可以根据
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000019
个相位中的任意一个相位来确定第一预编码。相比较而言,由上文示例所确定的第一预编码基于更多的信道信息而确定,因此可能更能够与此块资源相适配。
Of course, network equipment can also be based on
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000019
Any one of the two phases determines the first precoding. In comparison, the first precoding determined by the above example is determined based on more channel information, and therefore may be more able to adapt to this block resource.
在情况二中,由于预编码粒度小于上报粒度(或测量粒度),故针对一个预编码粒度大小的一块资源,网络设备可以根据与此块资源对应的第一上行信道或第一下行信道的相位来确定与此块资源对应的第一预编码。In the second case, since the precoding granularity is smaller than the reporting granularity (or measurement granularity), for a block of resources with a precoding granularity, the network device can use the first uplink channel or the first downlink channel corresponding to this block of resources. The phase is used to determine the first precoding corresponding to this block resource.
可选地,该方法200还包括:步骤207,网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示对第一上行信号的调制方式,对第一上行信号的调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。相应地,在步骤207中,第一终端设备接收该第二指示信息。Optionally, the method 200 further includes: step 207, the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, and the modulation mode for the first uplink signal includes BPSK or π. /2-BPSK. Correspondingly, in step 207, the first terminal device receives the second indication information.
可选地,对第一上行信号的调制方式为预定义的。例如,协议可以预先定义对上行信号采用怎样的调制方式。此情况下,步骤206可以省略。Optionally, the modulation mode for the first uplink signal is predefined. For example, the protocol can predefine what modulation method is used for the uplink signal. In this case, step 206 can be omitted.
其中,BPSK可通过两种相位来表示0和1。π/2-BPSK是BPSK在序列的奇数位时调制信号相位偏移π/2,序列的偶数位时和BPSK的相位一样,也就是通过四种相位来表示0和1。关于BPSK和π/2-BPSK的具体实现过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,本文中不做详述。Among them, BPSK can express 0 and 1 through two phases. π/2-BPSK means that the phase of the modulated signal of BPSK is shifted by π/2 when the odd-numbered bit of the sequence is in the sequence, and the phase of the even-numbered bit of the sequence is the same as that of BPSK, that is, 0 and 1 are represented by four phases. Regarding the specific implementation process of BPSK and π/2-BPSK, reference may be made to the prior art. For the sake of brevity, this article will not elaborate.
在本申请实施例中,若网络设备为第一终端设备和第二终端设备调度了相同的时频资源用于上行信号的传输,即,第一上行信道与第二上行信道占用相同的时频资源,或者说,第一上行信道或第二上行信道存在重叠,网络设备可以根据上文列举的公式来确定和指示第一预编码和第二预编码,第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以分别基于网络设备的指示,通过预编码操作来消除二者之间的相互干扰。In this embodiment of the application, if the network device schedules the same time-frequency resource for the first terminal device and the second terminal device for uplink signal transmission, that is, the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel occupy the same time-frequency resource. Resource, in other words, the first uplink channel or the second uplink channel overlap, the network device can determine and indicate the first precoding and the second precoding according to the formula listed above, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device can Based on the instructions of the network equipment respectively, the mutual interference between the two is eliminated through the precoding operation.
当然,第一上行信道与第二上行信道也可以存在部分重叠,例如,第一上行信道与第二上行信道在时域和/或频域上存在部分重叠。本申请对此不做限定。Of course, the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel may also partially overlap. For example, the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel partially overlap in the time domain and/or frequency domain. This application does not limit this.
此外,若网络设备基于第一终端设备反馈的第一信道信息和第二终端设备反馈的第二信道信息确定第一预编码和第二预编码,该第一上行信道的频域资源可以落在第一下行信道的测量带宽内,该第二上行信道的频域资源可以落在第二下行信道的测量带宽内,从而有利于获得与第一上行信道和第二上行信道相适配的第一预编码和第二预编码。In addition, if the network device determines the first precoding and the second precoding based on the first channel information fed back by the first terminal device and the second channel information fed back by the second terminal device, the frequency domain resources of the first uplink channel may fall on Within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, the frequency domain resources of the second uplink channel may fall within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, thereby facilitating obtaining the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel adapted to the second uplink channel. A precoding and a second precoding.
可以理解,第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽部分或全部重叠。由于第一上行信道落在第一下行信道的测量带宽内,第二上行信道落在第二下行信道的测量带宽内,故第一下行信道的测量带宽和第二下行信道的测量带宽至少存在部分重叠。It can be understood that the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel partially or completely overlap. Since the first uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel, and the second uplink channel falls within the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel, the measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel are at least There is a partial overlap.
图3示出了第一上行信道、第二上行信道以及所对应的第一下行信道的测量带宽、第二下行信道的测量带宽。如图所示,图中阴影为第一上行信道和第二上行信道,由于第一上行信道和第二上行信道占用相同的时频资源,故在图中为同一块资源。第一上行信道是可用于第一终端设备传输第一上行信号的上行传输资源,第二上行信道是可用于第二终端设备传输第二上行信号的上行传输资源。与第一上行信道相对应的第一下行信道的测量带宽如图中测量带宽1所示,与第二上行信道相对应的第二下行信道的测量带宽如图中测量带宽2所示。由于第一上行信道落在测量带宽1中,第二上行信道落在测量带宽2中,故测量带宽1和测量带宽2至少在第一上行信道(或第二上行信道)的频域资源处是重叠的。应理解,图中所示仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,测量带宽1和测量带宽 2也可以是完全重叠的。Figure 3 shows the first uplink channel, the second uplink channel, and the corresponding measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel. As shown in the figure, the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel are shaded in the figure. Since the first uplink channel and the second uplink channel occupy the same time-frequency resources, they are the same block of resources in the figure. The first uplink channel is an uplink transmission resource that can be used by the first terminal device to transmit the first uplink signal, and the second uplink channel is an uplink transmission resource that can be used by the second terminal device to transmit the second uplink signal. The measurement bandwidth of the first downlink channel corresponding to the first uplink channel is shown in measurement bandwidth 1 in the figure, and the measurement bandwidth of the second downlink channel corresponding to the second uplink channel is shown in measurement bandwidth 2 in the figure. Since the first uplink channel falls in the measurement bandwidth 1 and the second uplink channel falls in the measurement bandwidth 2, the measurement bandwidth 1 and the measurement bandwidth 2 are at least in the frequency domain resources of the first uplink channel (or the second uplink channel). Overlap. It should be understood that the figures shown in the figure are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, measurement bandwidth 1 and measurement bandwidth 2 can also be completely overlapped.
基于此,网络设备在向第一终端设备指示了第一预编码之后,还可以进一步向第二终端设备指示第二预编码。Based on this, after the network device indicates the first precoding to the first terminal device, it may further indicate the second precoding to the second terminal device.
可选地,该方法还包括:步骤208,网络设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示第二预编码。相应地,在步骤208中,第二终端设备接收该第四指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: step 208, the network device sends fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second precoding. Correspondingly, in step 208, the second terminal device receives the fourth indication information.
网络设备通过第四指示信息向第二终端设备指示第二预编码的具体过程与上文所述步骤205的具体过程相似,由于上文步骤205中已经对该具体过程做了详细说明。为了简洁,这里不做赘述。The specific process of the network device indicating the second precoding to the second terminal device through the fourth indication information is similar to the specific process of step 205 described above, because the specific process has been described in detail in step 205 above. For the sake of brevity, I won't repeat them here.
在一种可能的设计中,第二预编码的相位为预定义值。可选地,该预定义值为0或±π/2。In a possible design, the phase of the second precoding is a predefined value. Optionally, the predefined value is 0 or ±π/2.
该预定义值例如可以由协议预定义,或者由网络设备与终端设备之间预先协商确定。此情况下,网络设备对第二预编码可以不做指示。步骤208可以省略,网络设备通过步骤205向第一终端设备指示第一预编码即可。The predefined value may be predefined by a protocol, or determined through pre-negotiation between the network device and the terminal device, for example. In this case, the network device may not indicate the second precoding. Step 208 may be omitted, and the network device may indicate the first precoding to the first terminal device through step 205.
该预定义值也可以由网络设备通过步骤208指示给第二终端设备。本申请对此不作限定。The predefined value may also be instructed by the network device to the second terminal device through step 208. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该方法还包括:步骤209,网络设备发送预编码粒度的指示信息。相应地,在步骤209中,第二终端设备接收预编码粒度的指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: step 209, the network device sends indication information of precoding granularity. Correspondingly, in step 209, the second terminal device receives the indication information of the precoding granularity.
网络设备可以通过同一信令将预编码粒度通知给小区中的各终端设备。此情况下,上述步骤206和步骤209可以合为一个步骤来执行。The network device can notify each terminal device in the cell of the precoding granularity through the same signaling. In this case, the above step 206 and step 209 can be combined into one step to be executed.
网络设备也可以通过不同的信令,分别向各终端设备指示预编码粒度。此情况下,上述步骤206和步骤209可以作为独立的两个步骤来执行。The network device may also indicate the precoding granularity to each terminal device through different signaling. In this case, the above step 206 and step 209 can be performed as two independent steps.
此外,如前所述,预编码粒度可以是预定义的。此情况下,上述步骤206和步骤209都可以省略。In addition, as mentioned above, the precoding granularity may be predefined. In this case, the above steps 206 and 209 can be omitted.
可选地,该方法还包括:步骤210,网络设备发送第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示对第二上行信号的调制方式,对第二上行信号的调制方式为BPSK或π/2-BPSK。相应地,第二终端设备接收该第五指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: step 210, the network device sends fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the modulation mode for the second uplink signal, and the modulation mode for the second uplink signal is BPSK or π/ 2-BPSK. Correspondingly, the second terminal device receives the fifth indication information.
网络设备可以同一信令将对第一上行信号和第二上行信号的调制方式通知第一终端设备和第二终端设备。例如通过组播的方式来发送该信令。此情况下,上述步骤207和步骤210可以合为一个步骤来执行。The network device can notify the first terminal device and the second terminal device of the modulation mode for the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal in the same signaling. For example, the signaling is sent by multicast. In this case, the above step 207 and step 210 can be combined into one step to be executed.
网络设备也可以通过不同的信令,分别向各终端设备指示对各自的上行信号的调制方式。此情况下,上述步骤207和步骤210可以作为独立的两个步骤来执行。The network equipment may also indicate to each terminal equipment the modulation mode of the respective uplink signal through different signaling. In this case, the above step 207 and step 210 can be performed as two independent steps.
如前所述,对上行信号的调制方式也可以是预定义的。故,上述步骤207和210也可以省略。As mentioned earlier, the modulation method for the uplink signal can also be predefined. Therefore, the above steps 207 and 210 can also be omitted.
一种可能的设计是,第一终端设备对第一上行信号的调制方式与第二终端设备对第二上行信号的调制方式相同。例如,都采用BPSK的调制方式,或都采用π/2-BPSK的调制方式。A possible design is that the modulation mode of the first uplink signal by the first terminal device is the same as the modulation mode of the second uplink signal by the second terminal device. For example, all adopt BPSK modulation method, or all adopt π/2-BPSK modulation method.
当第一终端设备对第一上行信号采用BPSK的调制方式,第二终端设备对第二上行信号也采用BPSK的调制方式时,网络设备对第一上行信号的接收信号中,第一上行信道的相位和第二上行信道的相位不变,网络设备对第二上行信号的接收信号中,第一上行信道 的相位和第二上行信道的相位也不变。故,网络设备可以基于上文所列举的公式来确定第一预编码和第二预编码。When the first terminal device uses the BPSK modulation method for the first uplink signal, and the second terminal device also uses the BPSK modulation method for the second uplink signal, the network device receives the first uplink signal in the first uplink channel. The phase and the phase of the second uplink channel are unchanged, and in the received signal of the second uplink signal by the network device, the phase of the first uplink channel and the phase of the second uplink channel are also unchanged. Therefore, the network device may determine the first precoding and the second precoding based on the formulas listed above.
当第一终端设备对第一上行信号采用π/2-BPSK的调制方式,第二终端设备对第二上行信号也采用π/2-BPSK的调制方式时,π/2-BPSK对信号进行BPSK后的调制符号的相位进行了偏转。比如,以用于传输上行信号的时频资源上的第n个RE上的信号为例,经π/2-BPSK后的符号记为z n,经BPSK后的符号记为d n,则z n=j n·d n。结合上文公式可以发现,如果对第一上行信号和第二上行信号进行了π/2-BPSK调制,网络设备所获得的接收信号中的相位会发生变化。 When the first terminal device uses the π/2-BPSK modulation method for the first uplink signal and the second terminal device also uses the π/2-BPSK modulation method for the second uplink signal, the π/2-BPSK performs BPSK on the signal The phase of the subsequent modulation symbol is deflected. For example, taking the signal on the nth RE on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the uplink signal as an example, the symbol after π/2-BPSK is denoted as z n , and the symbol after BPSK is denoted as d n , then z n =j n ·d n . In combination with the above formula, it can be found that if the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are modulated by π/2-BPSK, the phase of the received signal obtained by the network device will change.
比如,第一上行信号经过π/2-BPSK后的调制符号较经过BPSK后的调制符号偏转了π/2,第二上行信号经过π/2-BPSK后的调制符号较经过BPSK后的调制符号也偏转了π/2。但可以发现,二者可以相互抵消,故第一预编码和第二预编码的相位仍可以满足上述公式。以网络设备对第一上行信号的接收信号为例,该接收信号的实部y'为:For example, the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal after π/2-BPSK is deflected by π/2 compared to the modulation symbol after BPSK, and the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal after π/2-BPSK is greater than the modulation symbol after BPSK. Also deflected by π/2. However, it can be found that the two can cancel each other, so the phases of the first precoding and the second precoding can still satisfy the above formula. Taking the received signal of the first uplink signal by the network device as an example, the real part y'of the received signal is:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000020
因此,要想消除二者之间的相互干扰,第一预编码的相位β 1与第二预编码的相位β 2的差值β 21应该无限趋近于σ 21±π/2即可。 Therefore, in order to eliminate the mutual interference between the two , the difference β 2- β 1 between the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 should be infinitely close to σ 21 ±π /2 is fine.
在某些情况下,第一终端设备和第二终端设备在分别采用π/2-BPSK的调制方式时,在相同的RE上可能对第一上行信号和第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后的调制符号相对于经BPSK后的调制符号旋转的相位不同,比如,第一上行信号的调制符号旋转了π/2,第二上行信号的调制符号旋转了π,二者无法相互抵消。以网络设备对第一上行信号的接收信号为例,该接收信号的实部y'为:In some cases, when the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment respectively adopt the π/2-BPSK modulation mode, they may perform π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal on the same RE. The phase of the subsequent modulation symbol is different from that of the BPSK modulation symbol. For example, the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal is rotated by π/2, and the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal is rotated by π, and the two cannot cancel each other. Taking the received signal of the first uplink signal by the network device as an example, the real part y'of the received signal is:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000021
要想消除二者之间的相互干扰,第一预编码的相位β 1与第二预编码的相位β 2的差值β 21应该无限趋近于σ 21或无限趋近于σ 21±π即可。 To eliminate the mutual interference between the two , the difference β 21 between the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 should be infinitely close to σ 21 or infinitely close It is sufficient to be within σ 2 -σ 1 ±π.
又或者,第一终端设备和第二终端设备在分别采用π/2-BPSK的调制方式时,在相同的RE上对第一上行信号和第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后的调制符号相对于经BPSK后的调制符号旋转的相位不同,比如,第一上行信号的调制符号旋转了π/2,第二上行信号的调制符号旋转了3π/2,二者无法相互抵消。以网络设备对第一上行信号的接收信号为例,该接收信号的实部y'为:Or, when the first terminal equipment and the second terminal equipment respectively adopt the π/2-BPSK modulation mode, the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are modulated by π/2-BPSK on the same RE. The phase of the modulation symbol rotation after BPSK is different. For example, the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal is rotated by π/2, and the modulation symbol of the second uplink signal is rotated by 3π/2, and the two cannot cancel each other. Taking the received signal of the first uplink signal by the network device as an example, the real part y'of the received signal is:
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2020084542-appb-000022
要想消除二者之间的相互干扰,第一预编码的相位β 1与第二预编码的相位β 2的差值 β 21应该无限趋近于σ 21±π/2即可。 In order to eliminate the mutual interference between the two , the difference β 2- β 1 between the first precoding phase β 1 and the second precoding phase β 2 should be infinitely close to σ 21 ±π/2 That's it.
基于上文所述可以发现,在第一上行信号和第二上行信号通过相同的时频资源传输的情况下,网络设备只要预先知道对第一上行信号的调制方式和对第二上行的调制方式,以及在调制方式为π/2-BPSK的情况下,对各RE上的调制符号的相位旋转角度,便可以基于上文列举的公式,作出相应的变形,进而确定第一预编码的相位和第二预编码的相位。因此,即便对第一上行信号和第二上行信号使用了不同的调制方式,比如一个使用BPSK,另一个使用π/2-BPSK,也仍然可以基于相同的构思确定第一预编码的相位和第二预编码的相位。Based on the above, it can be found that when the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal are transmitted through the same time-frequency resource, the network device only needs to know the modulation method for the first uplink signal and the modulation method for the second uplink in advance. , And when the modulation mode is π/2-BPSK, the phase rotation angle of the modulation symbol on each RE can be modified based on the formula listed above to determine the phase sum of the first precoding The phase of the second precoding. Therefore, even if different modulation methods are used for the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, for example, one uses BPSK and the other uses π/2-BPSK, the phase of the first precoding and the first precoding can still be determined based on the same concept. Two precoding phase.
在一种实现方式中,可以限制对第一上行信号和第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK之后生成的调制符号的相位。In an implementation manner, the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal may be restricted.
例如,限制在用于传输第一上行信号和第二上行信号的时频资源上的某一指定RE上的相位为π/2或-π/2。比如,指定该时频资源上的第一个RE上的相位为π/2或-π/2。For example, the phase of a certain designated RE on the time-frequency resource used to transmit the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal is restricted to π/2 or -π/2. For example, specify that the phase of the first RE on the time-frequency resource is π/2 or -π/2.
此情况下,两个上行信号的相位偏转角相同,可以相互抵消。网络设备仍然可以基于上文所列举的公式来确定第一预编码的相位和第二预编码的相位。In this case, the phase deflection angles of the two uplink signals are the same and can cancel each other. The network device may still determine the phase of the first precoding and the phase of the second precoding based on the formulas listed above.
上述对第一上行信号和/或第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK之后生成的调制符号的相位可以由网络设备通过信令指示。The phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal and/or the second uplink signal may be indicated by the network device through signaling.
可选地,该方法还包括:步骤211,网络设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用指示对第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。相应地,在步骤211中,第一终端设备接收该第三指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: step 211, the network device sends third indication information, the third indication information indicating the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal. Correspondingly, in step 211, the first terminal device receives the third indication information.
可选地,该方法还包括:步骤212,网络设备发送第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示对第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。相应地,在步骤212中,第二终端设备接收该第六指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: step 212, the network device sends sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the second uplink signal. Correspondingly, in step 212, the second terminal device receives the sixth indication information.
网络设备可以同一信令来将上述进行π/2-BPSK之后生成的调制符号的相位通知第一终端设备和第二终端设备。此情况下,上述步骤211和步骤212可以合为一个步骤来执行。The network device can notify the first terminal device and the second terminal device of the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing π/2-BPSK in the same signaling. In this case, the above step 211 and step 212 can be combined into one step to be executed.
网络设备也可以通过不同的信令,分别向各终端设备指示进行π/2-BPSK之后生成的调制符号的相位。此情况下,上述步骤211步骤212可以作为独立的两个步骤来执行。The network device may also indicate to each terminal device the phase of the modulation symbol generated after performing π/2-BPSK through different signaling. In this case, the above-mentioned step 211 and step 212 can be performed as two independent steps.
可选地,对上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位为预定义值。例如,协议可以预先定义对上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。即,上述偏移的方向可以由协议预定义。比如,协议预定义在某一指定的RE上的相位为π/2,或者,协议预定义在某一指定的RE上的相位为-π/2。此情况下,步骤211和步骤212可以省略。应理解,本申请对该预定义值的具体取值不作限定。Optionally, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the uplink signal is a predefined value. For example, the protocol can predefine the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the uplink signal. That is, the direction of the above offset may be predefined by the protocol. For example, the protocol predefines the phase on a specified RE as π/2, or the protocol predefines the phase on a specified RE as -π/2. In this case, step 211 and step 212 can be omitted. It should be understood that this application does not limit the specific value of the predefined value.
此外,当网络设备通过第二指示信息向第一终端设备指示调制方式,并通过第三指示信息指示进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位时,上述第二指示信息和第三指示信息可以是携带在同一个信令中的信息,也可以是携带在不同信令中的信息,本申请对此不作限定。In addition, when the network device indicates the modulation mode to the first terminal device through the second indication information, and indicates the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after π/2-BPSK is performed through the third indication information, the second indication information and the third indication The information may be information carried in the same signaling or information carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
当网络设备通过第五指示信息向第二终端设备指示调制方式,并通过第六指示信息指示进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位时,上述第五指示信息和第六指示信息可以是携带在同一个信令中的信息,也可以是携带在不同信令中的信息,本申请对此不作限定。When the network device indicates the modulation mode to the second terminal device through the fifth indication information, and indicates the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after π/2-BPSK is performed through the sixth indication information, the fifth indication information and the sixth indication information may be It is the information carried in the same signaling, or it may be the information carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
网络设备还可通过同一信令来指示对第一上行信号的调制方式和对第二上行信号的 调制方式,以及进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。即,上述第二指示信息、第二指示信息、第五指示信息和第六指示信息可以携带在同一个信令中。The network equipment can also indicate the modulation mode for the first uplink signal and the modulation mode for the second uplink signal through the same signaling, and the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after π/2-BPSK. That is, the foregoing second indication information, second indication information, fifth indication information, and sixth indication information may be carried in the same signaling.
又或者,上述对上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位可以是预定义值,在网络设备指示了调制方式为π/2-BPSK的情况下,终端设备便可直接根据该预定义值确定调制符号的相位。Alternatively, the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after performing π/2-BPSK on the uplink signal may be a predefined value. In the case that the network device indicates that the modulation mode is π/2-BPSK, the terminal device can directly The predefined value determines the phase of the modulation symbol.
在步骤213中,第一终端设备对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,得到预编码后的第一上行信号;并在步骤214中通过第一上行信道发送第一上行信号。相应地,在步骤214中,网络设备接收预编码后的第一上行信号。In step 213, the first terminal device precodes the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal to obtain the precoded first uplink signal; and in step 214, sends the first uplink signal through the first uplink channel. Correspondingly, in step 214, the network device receives the precoded first uplink signal.
在步骤215中,第二终端设备对第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,得到预编码后的第二上行信号;并在步骤216中通过第二上行信道发送第二上行信号。相应地,在步骤216中,网络设备接收预编码后的第二上行信号。In step 215, the second terminal device precodes the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal to obtain the precoded second uplink signal; and in step 216, transmits the second uplink signal through the second uplink channel. Correspondingly, in step 216, the network device receives the precoded second uplink signal.
由于上文已经结合公式详细说明了对调制符号进行预编码的过程,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Since the process of precoding the modulation symbols has been described in detail above in conjunction with the formula, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
第一终端设备通过第一上行信道向网络设备发送第一上行信号的过程以及第二终端设备通过第二上行信道向网络设备发送第二上行信号的过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,本文中不做详述。The process for the first terminal device to send the first uplink signal to the network device through the first uplink channel and the process for the second terminal device to send the second uplink signal to the network device through the second uplink channel can refer to the prior art. For brevity, this article Do not elaborate.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备可以基于第一下行信道的相位确定与第一上行信道适配的第一预编码,由此而确定的第一预编码为标量,该第一预编码可用于对第一上行信号的调制符号的星座图进行相位旋转,以此来实现预编码的操作。因此,相比于通过预编码矩阵对多个发射天线端口的信号进行加权处理的预编码操作而言,大大简化了预编码操作,降低了终端设备的处理复杂度。同时,利用了上下行信道的互易性,网络设备可以利用终端设备反馈的第一下行信道的信息,来确定与第一上行信道适配的预编码,网络设备确定预编码的过程也得以简化,计算量大大减少。Based on the above technical solution, the network device can determine the first precoding adapted to the first uplink channel based on the phase of the first downlink channel, and the determined first precoding is a scalar, and the first precoding can be used for The constellation diagram of the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal undergoes phase rotation, so as to realize the precoding operation. Therefore, compared to the precoding operation in which the signals of multiple transmit antenna ports are weighted through the precoding matrix, the precoding operation is greatly simplified, and the processing complexity of the terminal device is reduced. At the same time, taking advantage of the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network device can use the information of the first downlink channel fed back by the terminal device to determine the precoding adapted to the first uplink channel, and the network device can also determine the precoding process. Simplified, the amount of calculation is greatly reduced.
并且,在相同的时频资源上存在两个上行信号传输的情况下,可以基于上行信道或下行信道的相位,为两个上行信号的传输确定预编码,经过预编码之后的两个上行信号之间的干扰得以消除,因此有利于网络设备获得较好的接收质量,有利于提高系统传输性能。In addition, when there are two uplink signal transmissions on the same time-frequency resource, the precoding can be determined for the transmission of the two uplink signals based on the phase of the uplink channel or the downlink channel. One of the two uplink signals after precoding is Interference between them can be eliminated, which is beneficial for network equipment to obtain better reception quality, and is beneficial for improving system transmission performance.
应理解,在上文各实施例中,终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行各实施例中的部分或全部步骤。这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照各实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。且,各步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the above embodiments, the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution. The execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图4所示,该通信装置1000可以包括处理单元1100和收发单元1200。Fig. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiving unit 1200.
可选地,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的第一终端设备,例如,可以为第一终端设备,或者配置于第一终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。Optionally, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be the first terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system) configured in the first terminal device. Wait).
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的第一终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中第一终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法 200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the first terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2 . In addition, the units in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤213,收发单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤201b、步骤205至步骤207、步骤211和步骤214。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to perform the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 1100 can be used to perform step 213 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to perform step 201b, step 205 to step 207, and step 207 in the method 200. Step 211 and step 214. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
可选地,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的第一终端设备,例如,可以为第一终端设备,或者配置于第一终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。Optionally, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the first terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be the first terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system) configured in the first terminal device. Wait).
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的第二终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中第二终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the second terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the second terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2 . In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤215,收发单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤203步骤208至步骤210、步骤212和步骤216。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute step 215 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute step 203, step 208 to step 210, and step 203 of the method 200. 212 and step 216. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备(例如上述第一终端设备或第二终端设备)时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图5中示出的通信装置2000中的收发器2020或图6中示出的终端设备3000中的收发器3020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图5中示出的通信装置2000中的处理器2010或图6中示出的终端设备3000中的处理器3010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device (for example, the first terminal device or the second terminal device described above), the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the one shown in FIG. 5 The transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 or the transceiver 3020 in the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6, the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to The processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 or the processor 3010 in the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备(例如上述第一终端设备或第二终端设备)中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device (for example, the aforementioned first terminal device or the second terminal device), the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may use an input/output interface, The processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a processor, a microprocessor, or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip or a chip system.
可选地,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。Optionally, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤201a、步骤202至步骤204,收发单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤201b、步骤205至步骤212、步骤214和步骤216。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 201a, 202 to step 204 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 201b, 201b, and 204 in the method 200. Step 205 to step 212, step 214, and step 216. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图5中示出的通信装置2000中的收发器2020或图7中示出的基站4000中的RRU 4100,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图5中示出的通信装置2000中的处理器2010或图7中示出的基站4000中的处理单元4200或处理器4202。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 5 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 7 As shown in the RRU 4100 in the base station 4000, the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 5 or the processor 2010 shown in FIG. The processing unit 4200 or the processor 4202 in the base station 4000 is output.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可以通过该芯片或芯片系统上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 can be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
图5是本申请实施例提供的通信装置2000的另一示意性框图。如图5所示,该通信装置2000包括处理器2010、收发器2020和存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2020和存储器2030通过内部连接通路互相通信,该存储器2030用于存储指令,该处理器2010用于执行该存储器2030存储的指令,以控制该收发器2020发送信号和/或接收信号。FIG. 5 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5, the communication device 2000 includes a processor 2010, a transceiver 2020, and a memory 2030. The processor 2010, the transceiver 2020, and the memory 2030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path. The memory 2030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 2010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 2030 to control the transceiver 2020 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
应理解,该通信装置2000可以对应于上述方法实施例中的终端设备,并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备执行的各个步骤和/或流程。可选地,该存储器2030可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。存储器2030可以是一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器2010中。该处理器2010可以用于执行存储器2030中存储的指令,并且当该处理器2010执行存储器中存储的指令时,该处理器2010用于执行上述与网络设备或终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个步骤和/或流程。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. Optionally, the memory 2030 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory. The memory 2030 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 2030, and when the processor 2010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 2010 is used to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
可选地,该通信装置2000是前文实施例中的第一终端设备。Optionally, the communication apparatus 2000 is the first terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
可选地,该通信装置2000是前文实施例中的第二终端设备。Optionally, the communication apparatus 2000 is the second terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
可选地,该通信装置2000是前文实施例中的网络设备。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
其中,收发器2020可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器2020还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。该处理器2010和存储器2030与收发器2020可以是集成在不同芯片上的器件。如,处理器2010和存储器2030可以集成在基带芯片中,收发器2020可以集成在射频芯片中。该处理器2010和存储器2030与收发器2020也可以是集成在同一个芯片上的器件。本申请对此不作限定。Among them, the transceiver 2020 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 2020 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more. The processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may be devices integrated on different chips. For example, the processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 2020 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip. The processor 2010, the memory 2030, and the transceiver 2020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该通信装置2000是配置在终端设备中的部件,如电路、芯片、芯片系统等。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and so on.
可选地,该通信装置2000是配置在网络设备中的部件,如电路、芯片、芯片系统等。Optionally, the communication device 2000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
其中,收发器2020也可以是通信接口,如输入/输出接口、电路等。该收发器2020与处理器2010和存储器2020都可以集成在同一个芯片中,如集成在基带芯片中。Among them, the transceiver 2020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and so on. The transceiver 2020, the processor 2010 and the memory 2020 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
图6是本申请实施例提供的终端设备3000的结构示意图。该终端设备3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示,该终端设备3000包括处理器3010和收发器3020。可选地,该终端设备3000还包括存储器3030。其中,处理器3010、收发器3020和存储器3030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器3030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器3010用于从该存储器3030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器3020收发信号。可选地,终端设备3000还可以包括天线3040,用于将收发器3020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 3000 provided in an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the terminal device 3000 includes a processor 3010 and a transceiver 3020. Optionally, the terminal device 3000 further includes a memory 3030. Among them, the processor 3010, the transceiver 3020, and the memory 3030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 3030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 3010 is used to download from the memory 3030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 3020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 3000 may further include an antenna 3040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 3020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器3010可以和存储器3030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器3010用于执行存储器3030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器3030也可以集成在处理器3010中,或者独立于处理器3010。该处理器3010可以与图4中的处理单元1100或图5中的处理器2010对应。The foregoing processor 3010 and the memory 3030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 3010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 3030 to implement the foregoing functions. During specific implementation, the memory 3030 may also be integrated in the processor 3010 or independent of the processor 3010. The processor 3010 may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 4 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 5.
上述收发器3020可以与图4中的收发单元1200或图5中的收发器2020对应。收发 器3020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The aforementioned transceiver 3020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 4 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 5. The transceiver 3020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图6所示的终端设备3000能够实现图2所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备(例如上述第一终端设备或第二终端设备)的各个过程。终端设备3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 3000 shown in FIG. 6 can implement various processes involving the terminal device (for example, the foregoing first terminal device or the second terminal device) in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 3000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述处理器3010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器3020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 3010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 3020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备3000还可以包括电源3050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the aforementioned terminal device 3000 may further include a power supply 3050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备3000还可以包括输入单元3060、显示单元3070、音频电路3080、摄像头3090和传感器3100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器3082、麦克风3084等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 3000 may also include one or more of the input unit 3060, the display unit 3070, the audio circuit 3080, the camera 3090, and the sensor 3100. The audio circuit It may also include a speaker 3082, a microphone 3084, and so on.
图7是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站4000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示,该基站4000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)4100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))4200。所述RRU 4100可以称为收发单元,可以与图4中的收发单元1200或图5中的收发器2020对应。可选地,该RRU 4100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线4101和射频单元4102。可选地,RRU 4100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 4100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 4200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 4100与BBU 4200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the base station 4000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 4100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 4200. The RRU 4100 may be called a transceiver unit, and may correspond to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 4 or the transceiver 2020 in FIG. 5. Optionally, the RRU 4100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 4101 and a radio frequency unit 4102. Optionally, the RRU 4100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit. The receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver or receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU 4100 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 4200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, and so on. The RRU 4100 and the BBU 4200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 4200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图4中的处理单元1100或图5中的处理器2010对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 4200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 4 or the processor 2010 in FIG. 5, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding and multiplexing , Modulation, spread spectrum and so on. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 4200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 4200还包括存储器4201和处理器4202。所述存储器4201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器4202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器4201和处理器4202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 4200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 4200 further includes a memory 4201 and a processor 4202. The memory 4201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 4202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 4201 and the processor 4202 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图7所示的基站4000能够实现图2所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个 过程。基站4000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 7 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 4000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述BBU 4200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 4100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 4200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 4100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图7所示出的基站4000仅为网络设备的一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他形态的网络设备。例如,包括AAU,还可以包括CU和/或DU,或者包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit,ARU),或BBU;也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE),还可以为其它形态,本申请对于网络设备的具体形态不做限定。It should be understood that the base station 4000 shown in FIG. 7 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to other types of network equipment. For example, it may include AAU, it may also include CU and/or DU, or it may include BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; it may also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or it may be For other forms, this application does not limit the specific form of the network device.
其中,CU和/或DU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而AAU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。Among them, the CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send to or receive from the terminal device Actions. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
本申请还提供了一种处理装置,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中第一终端设备、第二终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The present application also provides a processing device, including at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing device executes the first terminal device, the first terminal device in any one of the foregoing method embodiments, and the The method executed by the second terminal device or network device.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和通信接口。所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合。所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中第一终端设备、第二终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is coupled with the processor. The communication interface is used to input and/or output information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data. The processor is used to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中第一终端设备、第二终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing device executes the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the first terminal device in any of the above method embodiments. The method performed by the network device.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集 成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2所示实施例中的终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 The method executed by the terminal device or the method executed by the network device.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2所示实施例中的第一终端设备执行的方法、第二终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code. When the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the program shown in FIG. 2 In the embodiment, the method executed by the first terminal device, the method executed by the second terminal device, or the method executed by the network device.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的第一终端设备和第二终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned first terminal device and second terminal device and one or more network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments. In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
上述实施例中,终端设备可以作为接收设备的一例,网络设备可以作为发送设备的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,发送设备和接收设备也可以均为终端设备等。本申请对于发送设备和接收设备的具体类型不作限定。In the foregoing embodiment, the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。 通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (58)

  1. 一种用于传输上行信号的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting uplink signals, characterized in that it comprises:
    生成第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位;所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;所述第一下行信道的相位用于确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;Generate first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of the first downlink channel; the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on the measurement of the first downlink channel; the first downlink channel The phase of the row channel is used to determine the first precoding, the first precoding is used to precode the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include symbols obtained by binary phase shift keying BPSK modulation, or , The symbol obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation;
    发送所述第一信道信息。Sending the first channel information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信道信息指示所述第一下行信道的相位在预定义的M 1个码字中所对应的码字,其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均分,M 1为大于1的整数。 The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the phase of the first codeword channel information indicating the first downlink channel in a predefined codewords M 1 corresponding, wherein the M phase one codeword in the range of 0 to 2π average, M 1 is an integer greater than 1.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收上报粒度的指示信息,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。Receiving indication information of reporting granularity, where the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  4. 如权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码;Receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding;
    基于所述第一预编码对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,得到预编码后的第一上行信号;Precoding the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal based on the first precoding to obtain a precoded first uplink signal;
    通过第一上行信道发送所述预编码后的第一上行信号。Sending the pre-coded first uplink signal through the first uplink channel.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。Receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, and the modulation mode includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
  6. 如权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,对所述第一上行信号的调制方式是预定义的,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。The method according to claim 4, wherein the modulation mode for the first uplink signal is predefined, and the modulation mode includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
  7. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。Receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the phase of the modulation symbol obtained by performing π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal.
  8. 如权利要求4至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 4 to 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。Receiving indication information of precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is a frequency domain granularity based on precoding the modulation symbol of the first uplink signal.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码粒度与上报粒度相同,所述上报粒度是上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。The method according to claim 8, wherein the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity, and the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  10. 如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,同一网络设备调度的上行资源用于所述第一上行信号和第二上行信号的传输,所述第一预编码的相位还与第二下行信道的相位和/或第二预编码的相位相关,其中,所述第二预编码用于对所述第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the uplink resources scheduled by the same network device are used for the transmission of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, and the phase of the first precoding is It is also related to the phase of the second downlink channel and/or the phase of the second precoding, where the second precoding is used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal, and the second downlink channel is Corresponding to the second uplink channel used for transmitting the second uplink signal.
  11. 一种用于传输上行信号的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting uplink signals, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位,所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;Receiving first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate a phase of a first downlink channel, and the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on a measurement on the first downlink channel;
    根据所述第一下行信道的相位确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;The first precoding is determined according to the phase of the first downlink channel, and the first precoding is used to precode the modulation symbols of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbols include those obtained by binary phase shift keying BPSK modulation The symbol of, or the symbol obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation;
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码。Sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送上报粒度的指示信息,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。Sending the indication information of the reporting granularity, where the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  13. 如权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。Send the indication information of the precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is the frequency domain granularity based on precoding the modulation symbols.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预编码粒度与测量粒度相同,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。The method according to claim 13, wherein the precoding granularity is the same as the measurement granularity, and the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  15. 如权利要求11至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信道的相位基于预定义的M 1个码字确定;其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均布,M 1为大于1的整数;所述第一信道信息指示所述M 1个码字中与所述第一下行信道的相位对应的码字。 The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, wherein the phase of the first channel is determined based on predefined M 1 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 1 codewords is at 0 Evenly distributed within the range of 2π, M 1 is an integer greater than 1, and the first channel information indicates the code word corresponding to the phase of the first downlink channel among the M 1 code words.
  16. 如权利要求11至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 15, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。Sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a modulation mode for the first uplink signal, and the modulation mode includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。Sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after π/2-BPSK modulation is performed on the first uplink signal.
  18. 如权利要求11至17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示第二预编码,所述第二预编码用于对第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码;所述第二预编码与所述第一预编码的相位差和第二下行信道与所述第一下行信道的相位差之间的差值为±π/2,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应。Send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate second precoding, and the second precoding is used to precode the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal; the second precoding and the first The difference between the phase difference of a precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel is ±π/2, and the second downlink channel is different from the one used to transmit the second uplink signal. Corresponding to the second uplink channel.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 18, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第二信道信息,所述第二信道信息用于指示所述第二下行信道的相位。Receiving second channel information, where the second channel information is used to indicate the phase of the second downlink channel.
  20. 如权利要求18或19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二预编码的相位为0或±π/2。The method according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the phase of the second precoding is 0 or ±π/2.
  21. 如权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 18 to 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示对所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。Send fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after π/2-BPSK modulation is performed on the second uplink signal.
  22. 如权利要求18至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位与所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位相同。The method according to any one of claims 18 to 21, wherein the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the second uplink signal is π/2-BPSK modulated is π/2 with the first uplink signal. -The phases of the modulation symbols obtained after BPSK modulation are the same.
  23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:
    处理单元,用于生成第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位;所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;所述第一下行信道的相位用于确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的二进制相移键控调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;A processing unit, configured to generate first channel information, where the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of the first downlink channel; the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on the measurement of the first downlink channel; The phase of the first downlink channel is used to determine a first precoding, and the first precoding is used to precode a binary phase shift keying modulation symbol of the first uplink signal, and the modulation symbol includes a binary phase shift keying modulation symbol. Symbols obtained by shift keying BPSK modulation, or symbols obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation;
    收发单元,用于发送所述第一信道信息。The transceiver unit is configured to send the first channel information.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信道信息指示所述第一下行信道的相位在预定义的M 1个码字中所对应的码字,其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均分,M 1为大于1的整数。 The apparatus as claimed in claim 23, wherein the phase of the first codeword channel information indicating the first downlink channel in a predefined codewords M 1 corresponding, wherein the M phase one codeword in the range of 0 to 2π average, M 1 is an integer greater than 1.
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收上报粒度的指示信息,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。The apparatus according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive indication information of reporting granularity, and the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  26. 如权利要求23至25中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码;The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding;
    所述处理单元还用于基于所述第一预编码对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,得到预编码后的第一上行信号;The processing unit is further configured to pre-code modulation symbols of the first uplink signal based on the first pre-coding to obtain a pre-coded first uplink signal;
    所述收发单元还用于通过第一上行信道发送所述预编码后的第一上行信号。The transceiving unit is further configured to send the precoded first uplink signal through the first uplink channel.
  27. 如权利要求26所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于通过第一上行信道发送所述预编码后的第一上行信号。The apparatus according to claim 26, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send the precoded first uplink signal through a first uplink channel.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,对所述第一上行信号的调制方式是预定义的,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein the modulation mode for the first uplink signal is predefined, and the modulation mode includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
  29. 如权利要求27或28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK后得到的调制符号的相位。The device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the transceiving unit is further configured to receive third indication information, and the third indication information is used to instruct to perform π/2-BPSK on the first uplink signal. The phase of the modulation symbol obtained afterwards.
  30. 如权利要求27至29中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对所述第一上行信号的调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。The apparatus according to any one of claims 27 to 29, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive indication information of precoding granularity, where the precoding granularity is a modulation symbol of the first uplink signal. The frequency domain granularity based on precoding.
  31. 如权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码粒度与上报粒度相同,所述上报粒度是上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the precoding granularity is the same as the reporting granularity, and the reporting granularity is the frequency domain granularity on which the first channel information is reported.
  32. 如权利要求23至31中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,同一网络设备调度的上行资源用于所述第一上行信号和第二上行信号的传输,所述第一预编码的相位还与第二下行信道的相位和/或第二预编码的相位相关,其中,所述第二预编码用于对所述第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应。The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 31, wherein the uplink resources scheduled by the same network device are used for the transmission of the first uplink signal and the second uplink signal, and the phase of the first precoding is It is also related to the phase of the second downlink channel and/or the phase of the second precoding, where the second precoding is used for precoding the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal, and the second downlink channel is Corresponding to the second uplink channel used for transmitting the second uplink signal.
  33. 如权利要求23至32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元为收发器,所述处理单元为处理器。The device according to any one of claims 23 to 32, wherein the transceiving unit is a transceiver, and the processing unit is a processor.
  34. 如权利要求23至33中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为终端设备。The device according to any one of claims 23 to 33, wherein the device is a terminal device.
  35. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发单元和处理单元;其中,A communication device, characterized in that it comprises a transceiver unit and a processing unit; wherein,
    所述收发单元用于接收第一信道信息,所述第一信道信息用于指示第一下行信道的相位,所述第一下行信道的相位基于对所述第一下行信道的测量得到;The transceiver unit is configured to receive first channel information, the first channel information is used to indicate the phase of a first downlink channel, and the phase of the first downlink channel is obtained based on the measurement of the first downlink channel ;
    所述处理单元用于根据所述第一下行信道的相位确定第一预编码,所述第一预编码用于对第一上行信号的二进制相移键控调制符号进行预编码,所述调制符号包括经二进制相移键控BPSK调制得到的符号,或,经π/2-BPSK调制得到的符号;The processing unit is configured to determine a first precoding according to the phase of the first downlink channel, and the first precoding is used to precode a binary phase shift keying modulation symbol of the first uplink signal, and the modulation Symbols include symbols obtained by binary phase shift keying BPSK modulation, or symbols obtained by π/2-BPSK modulation;
    所述收发单元还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码。The transceiver unit is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
  36. 如权利要求35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码。The apparatus according to claim 35, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first precoding.
  37. 如权利要求35或36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送预编码粒度的指示信息,所述预编码粒度为对调制符号进行预编码所基于的频域粒度。The device according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send indication information of precoding granularity, and the precoding granularity is the frequency domain granularity based on precoding the modulation symbols.
  38. 如权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述预编码粒度与测量粒度相同,所述上报粒度为上报所述第一信道信息所基于的频域粒度。The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the precoding granularity is the same as the measurement granularity, and the reporting granularity is a frequency domain granularity based on which the first channel information is reported.
  39. 如权利要求35至38中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信道的相位基于预定义的M 1个码字确定;其中,所述M 1个码字的相位在0至2π范围内均布,M 1为大于1的整数;所述第一信道信息指示所述M 1个码字中与所述第一下行信道的相位对应的码字。 The apparatus according to any one of claims 35 to 38, wherein the phase of the first channel is determined based on predefined M 1 codewords; wherein the phase of the M 1 codewords is at 0 Evenly distributed within the range of 2π, M 1 is an integer greater than 1, and the first channel information indicates the code word corresponding to the phase of the first downlink channel among the M 1 code words.
  40. 如权利要求35至39中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号的调制方式,所述调制方式包括BPSK或π/2-BPSK。The apparatus according to any one of claims 35 to 39, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate modulation of the first uplink signal Mode, the modulation mode includes BPSK or π/2-BPSK.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示对所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。The apparatus according to claim 40, wherein the transceiver unit is further used to send third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the first uplink signal is modulated by π/2-BPSK. The phase of the modulation symbol.
  42. 如权利要求35至41中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示第二预编码,所述第二预编码用于对第二上行信号的调制符号进行预编码;所述第二预编码与所述第一预编码的相位差和第二下行信道与所述第一下行信道的相位差之间的差值为±π/2,所述第二下行信道与用于传输所述第二上行信号的第二上行信道相对应。The apparatus according to any one of claims 35 to 41, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate second precoding, and the second Precoding is used to precode the modulation symbols of the second uplink signal; the phase difference between the second precoding and the first precoding and the phase difference between the second downlink channel and the first downlink channel The difference between is ±π/2, and the second downlink channel corresponds to the second uplink channel used to transmit the second uplink signal.
  43. 如权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第二信道信息,所述第二信道信息用于指示所述第二下行信道的相位。The apparatus according to claim 42, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second channel information, and the second channel information is used to indicate the phase of the second downlink channel.
  44. 如权利要求42或43所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二预编码的相位为0或±π/2。The apparatus according to claim 42 or 43, wherein the phase of the second precoding is 0 or ±π/2.
  45. 如权利要求42至44中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示对所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位。The apparatus according to any one of claims 42 to 44, wherein the transceiving unit is further configured to send fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information is used to instruct to perform π on the second uplink signal. /2-The phase of the modulation symbol obtained after BPSK modulation.
  46. 如权利要求42至45中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位与所述第一上行信号进行π/2-BPSK调制后得到的调制符号的相位相同。The apparatus according to any one of claims 42 to 45, wherein the phase of the modulation symbol obtained after the second uplink signal is π/2-BPSK modulated is π/2 with the first uplink signal. -The phases of the modulation symbols obtained after BPSK modulation are the same.
  47. 如权利要求35至46中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元为处理器,所述收发单元为收发器。The device according to any one of claims 35 to 46, wherein the processing unit is a processor, and the transceiving unit is a transceiver.
  48. 如权利要求35至47中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为网络设备。The device according to any one of claims 35 to 47, wherein the device is a network device.
  49. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执 行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 .
  50. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求11至22中任一项所述的方法。A processing device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 11 to 22 .
  51. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  52. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求11至22中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 11 to 22.
  53. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  54. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求11至22中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 11 to 22.
  55. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  56. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11至22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 11 to 22.
  57. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  58. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求11至22中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 11 to 22.
PCT/CN2020/084542 2020-04-13 2020-04-13 Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus WO2021207895A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/084542 WO2021207895A1 (en) 2020-04-13 2020-04-13 Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus
CN202080098864.5A CN115336192A (en) 2020-04-13 2020-04-13 Method and communication device for transmitting uplink signal

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/084542 WO2021207895A1 (en) 2020-04-13 2020-04-13 Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021207895A1 true WO2021207895A1 (en) 2021-10-21

Family

ID=78083786

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/084542 WO2021207895A1 (en) 2020-04-13 2020-04-13 Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115336192A (en)
WO (1) WO2021207895A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106302299A (en) * 2015-05-20 2017-01-04 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of multiple-user access method and device
CN108282207A (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 A kind of pre-coding matrix instruction methods, devices and systems
WO2018142016A1 (en) * 2017-02-02 2018-08-09 Nokia Technologies Oy Adaptive explicit csi feedback and overhead reduction
US20190190641A1 (en) * 2017-12-14 2019-06-20 Google Llc Reciprocal Beamforming

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106302299A (en) * 2015-05-20 2017-01-04 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of multiple-user access method and device
CN108282207A (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 A kind of pre-coding matrix instruction methods, devices and systems
WO2018142016A1 (en) * 2017-02-02 2018-08-09 Nokia Technologies Oy Adaptive explicit csi feedback and overhead reduction
US20190190641A1 (en) * 2017-12-14 2019-06-20 Google Llc Reciprocal Beamforming

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
INTEL CORPORATION: "On non-codebook Based UL Transmission", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1707350 ON NON-CODEBOOK BASED UL TRANSMISSION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Hangzhou, China; 20170515 - 20170519, 14 May 2017 (2017-05-14), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051272562 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115336192A (en) 2022-11-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021083068A1 (en) Method for reporting channel state information and communication apparatus
WO2021063178A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20230164004A1 (en) Channel parameter obtaining method and apparatus
WO2021083157A1 (en) Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus
US20230013510A1 (en) Method for indicating channel state information csi measurement and communication apparatus
US20230239014A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus
WO2021203373A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2021223084A1 (en) Uplink reference signal sending method, uplink reference signal receiving method, and communication device
US20230379020A1 (en) Precoding method and apparatus
WO2021159309A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN115088224B (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication device
WO2023109647A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and apparatus
WO2021207895A1 (en) Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus
WO2021189302A1 (en) Updating method and communication apparatus
WO2021081964A1 (en) Method for configuring transmission port of a downlink reference signal, and communication apparatus
WO2024093867A1 (en) Precoding indication method, and communication apparatus
WO2024061093A1 (en) Uplink precoding indication method and communication apparatus
WO2021146961A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
WO2021146938A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
WO2024051810A1 (en) Communication method and related apparatus
US20230261704A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2023160692A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021134207A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device
WO2021097625A1 (en) Channel determination method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20931590

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20931590

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1